Panasonic DVD Recorder DMR EX79 User Manual

Operating Instructions

DVD Recorder

Model No. DMR-EX79

Region number supported by this

unit

Region numbers are allocated to DVD Recorders

and DVD-Video according to where they are sold.

≥The region number of this unit is “4”.

≥The unit will play DVD-Video marked with labels

containing “4” or “ALL”.

Example:

ALL

Dear customer

Thank you for purchasing this product. For optimum

performance and safety, please read these

instructions carefully.

Before connecting, operating or adjusting this

product, please read the instructions completely.

Please keep this manual for future reference.

This DVD recorder is for viewing and recording

free to view channels only, not pay TV or

encrypted channels.

TV Guide system of this DVD recorder does not

support analogue broadcasts.

Trademark of the DVB Digital Video

Broadcasting Project

Declaration of Conformity (22nd October 2008)

No. 5966

About descriptions in these operating

instructions

≥Pages to be referred to are indicated as “> ±±”.

RQT9306-L

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table of contents

Getting started

Editing

Included accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4

The remote control information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4

Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4

HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5

Unit care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5

Editing titles/chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Creating, editing and playing playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Editing still pictures and music. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Copying

Quick Start Guide

Control reference guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6

Easy access to various functions —

FUNCTION MENU Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7

STEP 1 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8

STEP 2 Channel reception settings and

TV aspect settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9

HDD and disc information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10

USB memory information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11

Regarding DivX^®files, Music files and

Copying titles or playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Copy [Video (HDD to DVD)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Copying using the copying list–Advanced Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Copying a finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL,

DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and +R DL . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Copying SD Video from a video equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Copying still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Copying using the copying list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Copying still pictures on the USB memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Copying music to HDD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

About the Gracenote^®Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Copying music from a CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Copying music from a USB memory or

still pictures (JPEG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

Media handling (Disc/USB memory). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13

CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-R DL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Basic operations

To update the Gracenote^®Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Watching analogue and digital broadcasts . . . . . . . . . .14

Playing recorded video contents/

Setting menus

Playing play-only discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

Recording television programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16

Timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17

Deleting titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

Using on-screen menus/Status message. . . . . . . . . . . 54

HDD and disc management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Common procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Setting the protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Providing a name for a disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Deleting all titles and playlists—Delete all titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Deleting all the contents—Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Selecting the background style—Top Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Selecting whether to show the Top Menu first—

Auto-Play Select. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Enabling discs to be played on other equipment—Finalise . . . . 58

Creating Top Menu—Create Top Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Changing the unit’s settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Common procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Other Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Television operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Child Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Advanced operations

Notes for recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

Advanced recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

Recording modes and approximate recording times . . . . . . . . . 20

When the format confirmation screen is displayed. . . . . . . . . . . 20

When removing a recorded disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Playing while you are recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Copying from a video cassette recorder . . . . . . . . . . . .22

Manual recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

DV automatic recording (DV Auto Rec) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Advanced timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23

Using G-CODE system to make timer recordings

(Analogue broadcast only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Manually programming timer recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

To cancel recording when recording has already begun . . . . . . 24

To release the unit from recording standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Relief Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Auto Renewal Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Check, change or delete a programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Notes on timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Operations in the TV Guide system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Selecting the programme from the desired programme type or

category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Searching for the programme in the TV Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Advanced playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28

Operation during play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Changing audio during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Selecting recorded programmes (titles) to play—

DIRECT NAVIGATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29

Switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR appearance . . . . . . . . . . . 29

To sort the titles for easy searching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

To play grouped titles [HDD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

To edit the group of titles [HDD]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Playing DivX, Music files and still pictures (JPEG). . . .30

Showing the menu screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Playing DivX video contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Playing Music files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Playing still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Useful functions during still picture play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Playing music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

To play music CD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

To play music recorded on HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Useful functions during music play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Convenient functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

FUNCTION MENU Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

To pause the TV programme you are watching—

Reference

Additional connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Connecting a television with S VIDEO terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Connecting a television with COMPONENT VIDEO

terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Connecting an amplifier with a digital input terminal. . . . . . . . . . 67

Connecting a stereo amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Connecting with an HDMI compatible television and

receiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Connecting a television and VCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Troubleshooting guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Panasonic Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Back Cover

Pause Live TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Linked operations with the TV

(VIERA Link “HDAVI Control^TM”). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

Easy control only with VIERA remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Getting started

Included accessories

Please check and identify the supplied accessories.

(Product numbers correct as of April 2009. These may be subject to change.)

∏

(N2QAYB000343)

Remote control

AC mains lead

1 RF coaxial cable

2 Batteries

for remote control

1 Audio/Video cable

For use with this unit only. Do not

use it with other equipment.

Also, do not use cords for other

equipment with this unit.

The remote control information

∫ Batteries

∫ Use

≥Insert the poles (i and j) so to match in the remote control.

Remote control signal sensor

R6/LR6, AA

≥Use alkaline or manganese batteries.

≥Do not mix old and new batteries.

≥Do not use different types at the same time.

≥Do not heat or expose to flame.

7 m directly in front of the unit

≥Do not leave the battery(ies) in an automobile exposed to direct

sunlight for a long period of time with doors and windows closed.

≥Do not take apart or short circuit.

≥Do not attempt to recharge alkaline or manganese batteries.

≥Do not use batteries if the covering has been peeled off.

Mishandling of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage which can

damage items the fluid contacts and may cause a fire.

Remove if the remote control is not going to be used for a long

period of time. Store in a cool, dark place.

Remote control operations (> 6)

Safety precautions

Foreign matter

Placement

Do not let metal objects fall inside the unit. This can cause electric

shock or malfunction.

Do not let liquids get into the unit. This can cause electric shock or

malfunction. If this occurs, immediately disconnect the unit from the

power supply and contact your dealer.

Do not spray insecticides onto or into the unit. They contain

flammable gases which can ignite if sprayed into the unit.

Set the unit up on an even surface away from direct sunlight, high

temperatures, high humidity, and excessive vibration. These

conditions can damage the cabinet and other components, thereby

shortening the unit’s service life.

Do not place heavy items on the unit.

Voltage

Do not use high voltage power sources. This can overload the unit

and cause a fire.

Do not use a DC power source. Check the source carefully when

setting the unit up on a ship or other place where DC is used.

Service

Do not attempt to repair this unit by yourself. If sound is

interrupted, indicators fail to light, smoke appears, or any other

problem that is not covered in these instructions occurs, disconnect

the AC mains lead and contact your dealer or an authorized service

centre. Electric shock or damage to the unit can occur if the unit is

repaired, disassembled or reconstructed by unqualified persons.

AC mains lead protection

Ensure the AC mains lead is connected correctly and not

damaged. Poor connection and lead damage can cause fire or

electric shock. Do not pull, bend, or place heavy items on the lead.

Grasp the plug firmly when unplugging the lead. Pulling the AC

mains lead can cause electric shock.

Extend operating life by disconnecting the unit from the power

source if it is not to be used for a long time.

Do not handle the plug with wet hands. This can cause electric

shock.

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care

The HDD is a high precision recording instrument and because of its long recording capability and high speed operation it is a very special device

that is easily susceptible to damage.

As a basic rule, save important content to a disc as backup.

∫ The HDD is a device that is not built to withstand vibration/shock or dust

Depending on the setup environment and handling of the HDD some content may become damaged and play and recording may no longer be

possible. Especially during operation, do not subject the unit to any vibration, shock, or remove the AC mains lead from the household mains

socket. In the event of a power failure during recording or play, the content may be damaged.

∫ The HDD is a temporary storage device

The HDD is not an everlasting storage device for recorded content. Use the HDD as a temporary storage place for one-off viewing, editing, or

copying. It is recommended to save the recorded content on a disc or to keep the original data or CDs that they were copied from.

∫ Immediately save (backup) all content as soon as you feel there may be a problem with the HDD

If there is an irregularity within the HDD, repetitive strange sounds or problems with picture (block noise, etc.) may result. Using the HDD in this

condition may worsen the problem and in the worst case the HDD may no longer be usable. As soon as you notice this type of problem, copy all

content to disc and request service. Recorded content (data) on a HDD that has become unusable is unrecoverable.

≥When the unit is turned on or off, there may be an unexpected sound. This does not indicate a problem with this unit.

∫ Setup precautions

∫ Cigarette smoke etc. causes malfunction or

≥Do not place in an enclosed area where the rear cooling fan

and the cooling vents on the side are covered up.

≥Place the unit on a surface that is flat and not subject to

vibration or impact.

breakdown

The unit may breakdown if cigarette smoke or bug spray/vapor,

etc. gets inside the unit.

∫ While operating

≥Do not move the unit or subject to vibration or impact. (The HDD

may become damaged.)

≥Do not place on anything that

DO NOT

generates heat like a video cassette

recorder, etc.

≥Do not remove the AC mains lead from the household mains

socket, or flip the power breaker switch.

While the unit is on, the HDD is rotating at high speed. Sound or

movement due to rotation is normal.

≥Do not place in an area often subject to

temperature changes.

≥Place in an area where condensation

This unit

VCR

does not occur. Condensation is a

phenomenon where moisture forms on a

cold surface when there is an extreme

change in temperature. Condensation may cause internal

damage to the unit.

∫ When moving the unit

1 Turn the unit off. (Wait until “BYE” disappears from the display.)

2 Remove the AC mains lead from the household mains socket.

3 Move only after the unit has come to a complete stop (approx.

2 minutes) in order to avoid subjecting to vibration and shock.

(Even after turning the unit off, the HDD continues operating for

a short time.)

≥Conditions where condensation may occur

– When there is an extreme change in temperature (moving from

a very hot location to a very cold location, or vice versa, or

when subjected to an air conditioner or when cooled air directly

impacts the unit). When the HDD (warms during operation) is

subjected to cold air, condensation may form on the inside of

the HDD and may cause damage to the HDD heads, etc.

– When there is high humidity or a lot of steam in the room.

– During the rainy season.

In the above situation, without turning the unit on, let the unit

adjust to the room temperature and wait 2–3 hours until

condensation is gone.

∫ HDD recording time remaining

This unit records using a VBR (Variable bit rate) data compression system to vary recorded data segments to match video data segments which

may cause differences in the displayed amount of time and space remaining for recording.

If the remaining amount of time is insufficient, delete any unwanted titles to create enough space before you start recording. (Deleting a playlist

will not increase the amount of time.)

∫ Indemnity concerning recorded content

Panasonic does not accept any responsibility for damages directly or indirectly due to any type of problems that result in loss of recording or

edited content (data), and does not guarantee any content if recording or editing does not work properly. Likewise, the above also applies in a

case where any type of repair is made to the unit (including any other non-HDD related component).

Unit care

The precision parts in this unit are readily affected by the

environment, especially temperature, humidity, and dust.

Cigarette smoke also can cause malfunction or breakdown.

DO NOT

Do not place the unit on

amplifiers or equipment

that may become hot.

The heat can damage the unit.

To clean this unit, wipe with a soft, dry cloth.

≥Never use alcohol, paint thinner or benzine to clean this unit.

≥Before using chemically treated cloth, carefully read the

instructions that came with the cloth.

Observe the following points to ensure continued listening and

viewing pleasure.

Dust and dirt may adhere to the unit’s lens over time, making it

impossible to record or play discs.

Use the DVD lens cleaner (not included) about once every year,

depending on frequency of use and the operating environment.

Carefully read the lens cleaner’s instructions before use.

Note

Do not obstruct the rear panel’s internal cooling fan.

Before moving the unit, ensure the disc tray is empty.

Failure to do so will risk severely damaging the disc and the

unit.

DVD lens cleaner: RP-CL720E

≥This lens cleaner may not be for sale depending on the region.

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Quick Start

Guide

Control reference guide

Remote control

Instructions for operations are generally described using the remote control.



1 Turn the unit on (> 9)

2 Select drive [HDD or DVD] (> 15, 16)

Drive changes each time you press [DRIVE SELECT].

3 Select channels and title numbers, etc./Enter numbers

4 To delete unwanted recorded titles, timer programmes, still

pictures or music (> 18, 25, 43)

5 Basic operations for recording and play

6 Show digital channel information (> 14)/Programme information

within TV Guide screen (> 26)/Show status messages (> 55)

7 Selection/OK, Frame-by-frame (> 28)

8 Show DIRECT NAVIGATOR (> 29, 38)

9 Show OPTION menu (> 27, 38)







VOL

DRIVE

SELECT



PAGE

2 3

4 5 6

–for playing or editing titles and still pictures, etc.

–for searching for programmes

: Select audio (For playback and analogue broadcast) (> 28)

; Colour buttons





ANALOGUE

–for TV Guide operations (> 26)

8 9







–for switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen (> 29, 32, 34)

–for switching VIDEO/Playlists (> 47)

–for deactivating timer programme (> 24)

–for tuning settings (> 59)

G-Code

DELETE

INPUT

SELECT





SKIP

SLOW/SEARCH

< Show on-screen menu (> 54)

Menu for disc playback and changing DVB multi audio etc.

= Recording functions

PAUSE

PLAY/x1.3

STOP

≥[¥ REC] Start recording (> 16)

≥[REC MODE] Change recording mode (> 16)

> Transmit the remote control signal

? Television operations (> 65)

@ Channel select/Change pages in the TV Guide system

(> 16, 26)

A Select analogue channel (> 16)

STATUS

EXIT









B Input select (AV1, AV2, AV3, AV4 or DV) (> 22)

C Show G-CODE screen (> 23)

D Exit the menu screen





E Show the TV Guide screen (> 17, 26)

F Show FUNCTION MENU Display (> 35)

By using the FUNCTION MENU Display you may access the

main functions (Playback, Recording, etc.) quickly and easily.

G Return to previous screen



OPTION

RETURN







CREATE









DISPLAY

AUDIO

REC

CHAPTER

MANUAL SKIP

H Create chapter (> 28)

I Skip approx. 1 minute forward (> 28)

J Show Timer Recording screen (> 23)

K Skip the specified time (> 28)

REC MODE TIME SLIP PROG/CHECK





The unit’s display









REC

PLAY









1 Digital broadcast indicator

Lights when the unit is receiving digital broadcast.

2 Copying indicator

3 Recording/Playback indicator

Recording/Playback

indicator

Recording indicator

Playback

indicator

REC

PLAY

4 Timer recording indicator

5 Disc indicator

6 Drive [HDD or DVD] indicator

7 Main display section indicator

8 Recording mode indicator

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Main unit













REC

 

 



Pull to flip down the front

panel.

REC

1 Standby/on switch (Í/I) (> 9)

7 USB port (> 13)

Press to switch the unit from on to standby mode or vice versa. In

standby mode, the unit is still consuming a small amount of

power.

8 Stop (> 16, 28)

9 Start play (> 15)

: Channel select (> 16)

; Start recording (> 16)/Specify a time to stop recording (> 16)

< Remote control signal sensor

2 Disc tray (> 13)

3 Connection for digital video (DV) camcorder (> 22)

4 Connection for VCR, camcorder etc. (> 22)

5 Display (> 6)

6 Open/Close disc tray (> 13)

Rear panel terminals (> 8, 66, 67, 68, 69)

Easy access to various functions — FUNCTION MENU Display

“FUNCTION MENU” automatically appears when you turn the power on. (When “FUNCTION MENU Display” is set to “On” in the Setup menu)

You can access the main function quickly and easily.

Select when you wish to

playback the contents. The

DIRECT NAVIGATOR

screen or menu screen etc.

will be displayed.

1Playback

Video (> 15, 29)

DivX (> 30)

Picture (> 32)

Music (> 31)

Top Menu (> 15)

Menu (> 15)

Press [OK].

Select a function.

Selectable items are

displayed on the right.

Select the recording method.

2Recording

Timer Recording (> 17, 23)

G-Code Record (> 23)

Select the title or file type you

wish to delete. The DELETE

Navigator screen will be

displayed.

3Delete

FUNCTION MENU

Video (> 18)

Picture (> 43)

Music (> 43)

HDD

Remain 30:00 SP











Playback

Recording

Delete

Video

Picture

Music

Select the copy method.

4Copy

Video (HDD to DVD) (> 46)

Advanced Copy (> 47)

Copy Music CD (> 52)

Copy Music (> 52)

Copy

TV Guide

Others





Select when you wish to

watch or record a

programme. The TV Guide

will be displayed.

5TV Guide (> 17, 26)

Drive Select

RETURN

Select and execute a

function other than those

above, such as recording or

setting.

6Others

Playlists (> 40)

Flexible Rec (> 21)

DV Auto Rec (> 22)

HDD Management (> 56)

DVD Management (> 56)

Setup (> 59)

Change which drive is used.

7Drive Select

HDD

DVD

USB

Press [OK].

Select an item.

Note

If you do not need to display FUNCTION MENU when turning the

unit on, set “FUNCTION MENU Display” to “Off” in the Setup menu

(> 62).

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STEP 1 Connection

≥Before connection, turn off all equipment and read the appropriate operating instructions.

≥Refer to “Additional connections” (> 66) for connection using other terminals and connection with other equipment.

When the unit is not to be used for a long time

To save power, unplug it from the household

mains socket. This unit consumes a small

amount of power, even when it is turned off

Connecting to a television with 21-pin Scart terminal

You can also connect with the AV1 terminal on this unit using the 21-pin Scart cable.

≥If your television is equipped with RGB input capability, by connecting with a fully

wired 21-pin Scart cable you can see video using RGB output on this unit.

[approx. 2 W (“Power Save” is set to “On”)]

“AV1 Output” in the Setup menu (> 63)

Required setting

Connecting a television

To household mains socket

(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)

≥Connect to terminals of the same colour.

Television’s rear panel

To the aerial

AUDIO IN VIDEO IN

VHF/UHF

RF IN

RF coaxial cable

(included)

Audio/Video cable

(included)

AC mains lead

(included)

Other connections

(> below, 66)

Connect only after all other

connections are complete.

1 2

Cooling fan

AV1

(

)

OUT

OPTICAL

AC IN

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COMPONENT

(PCM/BIITSTREAM)

VIDEO OUT

Aerial cable

AV OUT

R-AUDIO-L

VIDEO

S-VIDEO

(

)

AV2 EXT

This unit’s rear panel

You can enjoy high-quality picture by changing the connection between this unit and your TV as follows.

Connecting to a TV with an HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) cable

When connected to an HDMI compatible unit, an uncompressed digital audio and video signal is transmitted. You can enjoy high quality, digital

video and audio with just one cord. When connecting to an HDMI-compatible HDTV (High Definition Television), the output can be switched to

1080p, 1080i or 720p HD video.

≥This unit incorporates HDMI^TM(V.1.3a with Deep Colour) technology.

≥Video sources converted to 1920k1080 resolution, while of high quality, will exhibit somewhat lower subjective image resolution than true,

native 1080p full-HD sources. See dealer for details.

≥Please use High Speed HDMI Cables that have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover).

≥When setting video output to “1080p”, please use the HDMI cables 5.0 meters or less.

Regarding VIERA Link “HDAVI Control^TM” function

When connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or a receiver equipped with the “HDAVI Control” function, linked operations would be possible.

[> 36, Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI Control^TM”)]

≥Non-HDMI-compliant cables cannot be utilised.

≥It is recommended that you use Panasonic’s HDMI cable.

Recommended part number:

RP-CDHG10 (1.0 m), RP-CDHG15 (1.5 m), RP-CDHG20 (2.0 m), RP-CDHG30 (3.0 m), RP-CDHG50 (5.0 m), etc.

Required setting

≥Set “Digital Audio Output” to “HDMI and

Optical” (> 63).

(The default setting is “HDMI and Optical”.)

Television’s rear panel

HDMI IN

HDMI cable

HDMI AV OUT

AV1

(

)

This unit’s

rear panel

OUT

OPTICAL

AC IN

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COMPONENT

(PCM/BBITSTREAM)

VIDEO OUT

AV OUT

R-AUDIO-L

VIDEO

S-VIDEO

(

)

AV2 EXT

Note

≥If you are connecting to a TV that is only compatible with 2 channel audio output, audio with 3 channels or more will be down mixed (> 81) and

output as 2 channels, even if connecting with an HDMI cable. (Some discs cannot be down mixed.)

≥You cannot connect this unit to DVI devices that are incompatible with HDCP.

For units compatible with HDCP (High-Bandwidth Digital Content Protection) copyright protection that are equipped with a digital DVI input

terminal (PC monitors, etc.):

RQT9306

Depending on the unit, images may not be displayed properly or at all when connecting with a DVI/HDMI switching cable. (Audio cannot be

output.)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STEP 2 Channel reception settings and TV aspect settings

The features of the power save function when the unit is in

standby mode are as below.

On^§1

Approx. 2 W

Not Quick

Cannot do

Power Save

Off

Approx. 15 W

Quick^§2

DRIVE

SELECT

Power consumption

Startup time

VOL

PAGE

Watching the picture

from the device

connected to AV2

Can do

2 3

4 5 6

Numbered

buttons

§1

ANALOGUE

“FL Display” is set to “Automatic” in the Setup menu.

8 9

(> 62)

G-Code

DELETE

INPUT

§2

It is possible to startup and start recording within several

seconds.

SELECT

SKIP

SLOW/SEARCH

–Depending on the type of TV or the connected terminal, it

may take time to display the screen.

PAUSE

PLAY/x1.3

EXIT

STOP

If the TV aspect setting screen appears on the television

STATUS

TV Aspect

16:9 WIDE TV

16:9

4:3 TV

Pan & Scan

3,4,2,1

Letterbox

OPTION

RETURN

SELECT

RETURN

CREATE

CHAPTER

DISPLAY

AUDIO

MANUAL SKIP

RETURN

5 Press [3, 4] to select the TV aspect

1 Turn on the television and select the

and press [OK].

appropriate AV input to suit the

connections to this unit.

≥16:9:

When connected to a 16:9 widescreen television

≥Pan & Scan:

2 Press [Í] to turn the unit on.

When connected to a 4:3 aspect television,

side picture is trimmed for 16:9 picture

(> 81).

When connecting to a television that has the VIERA Link

functions (> 36), downloading from the television starts.

You can download the tuning positions from the television for

the channels in this unit’s channel coverage.

≥Letterbox:

DVB Auto Setup starts.

The unit will search for the terrestrial digital channels.

This takes 5 minutes.

When connected to a 4:3 aspect television.

16:9 picture is shown in the letterbox style

(> 81).

DVB Auto Setup

When television picture appears, set up is complete.

Scan

CH 6

Type Quality

Channel Name

When clock setting screen is displayed

ABC

ABC 2

Data

In step 3, if the clock setting screen appears on the television, set

the clock manually.

This is a 24-hour clock.

TV : 1

Radio : 0

Data : 1

Searching...

RETURN

Clock

≥Terrestrial digital channels are stored into logical channel

numbers.

≥Analogue channels are preset at the time of shipping. If you

would like to add new TV channels, set them manually

(> 60).

Time

Date

2009

Number

Please set the clock.

OK: access RETURN: leave

CHANGE

DVB Auto Setup is complete when Region Selection screen

appears.

SELECT

RETURN

Press [2, 1] to select the item you want to change and press

[3, 4] to change the setting.

The items change as follows:

Hour!#Minute!#Second!#Day!#Month!#Year

^-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------J

≥You can also use the numbered buttons for setting.

Press [OK] when you have finished the settings.

3 Press [3, 4] to select your region

and press [OK].

The time information for your region can be obtained.

Region Selection

NSW / ACT

Victoria

Power Save setting screen appears.

(> Go to step 4)

Queensland

South Australia

Western Australia

Northern Territory

SELECT

To stop partway

Press [RETURN ].

Tasmania

RETURN

≥If the clock setting screen is displayed (> right)

∫ To confirm that stations have been tuned

4 Press [3, 4] to select “On” or “Off”

and press [OK] when the “Power

Save” setting menu appears.

correctly (> 60)

∫ To restart set up (> 59)

Power Save

Off

On : Minimises standby power

consumption, disables Quick

Start function. FL Display is

set to "Automatic".

≥On:

It will go into the Power Save mode when the unit

is in standby condition.

RQT9306

≥Off: It is possible to start quickly from the standby

mode. (Quick Start mode)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HDD and disc information

HDD and discs you can use for recording and play

(≤: Possible, –: Impossible)

Disc type

Logo

–

Data that can Rewritable Play on other Recording 16:9 Recording both M 1

Copy-once

recording

(CPRM)

players^§1

aspect picture^§2

be recorded

and played

and M 2 for bilingual

broadcasts^§2

Standard symbol

Hard disk drive (HDD)

Video

Still picture

Music

≤

–

≤

[HDD]

DVD-RAM

[RAM]

Video

Still picture

≤

CPRM (> 81)

compatible discs

only.

§3

Video^§5

–

DVD-R

[-R] before finalisation

[DVD-V] after finalisation

(Video only)

–

≤

–

(Either one)

Still picture^§

§3

DVD-R DL^§4

–

Video

–

[-R]DL] before finalisation

[DVD-V] after finalisation

(Either one)

§3

DVD-RW

[-RW‹V›] before finalisation

[DVD-V] after finalisation

Video

≤

–

≤

–

(Either one)

§3

–

– (4:3 aspect)

–

[+R] before finalisation

[DVD-V] after finalisation

+R DL^§4

[+R]DL] before finalisation

[DVD-V] after finalisation

(Either one)

§3

–

(Either one)

§3

+RW

[+RW]

≤

–

(Either one)

§1

[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]

Note

Finalisation is needed for playback on other equipment (> 58).

[RAM] can be played back on Panasonic DVD recorders and

DVD-RAM compatible DVD players.

≥When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”, the restrictions on

secondary audio recording are also applied to DVD-RAM. Turn this

setting “Off” if high speed copy to [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]

[+RW] is not necessary (The default setting is “On”. > 61).

≥+R discs recorded with this unit and +R discs recorded with

another Panasonic DVD Recorder may be incompatible. However,

discs that are finalised are compatible and can be played.

≥This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have

PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can

be recorded onto the HDD.)

[-R]DL], [+R]DL] or [+RW] can be played back only on equipment

compatible with these discs.

For further information (> 19, Notes for recording)

The audio selected in “Bilingual Audio Selection” (> 62) is

recorded.

[-R]DL] [+R]DL] You cannot directly record to these discs (> right).

[-R] Videos and still pictures cannot be mixed on one disc.

§2

§3

§4

§5

≥[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] To use a new disc, formatting is

necessary (> 57).

≥[+RW] If the disc failed to play on other equipment, we recommend

you create top menu (> 58).

≥You may not be able to record depending on the condition of the

discs and you may not be able to play due to the condition of the

recording.

≥Use of Panasonic discs is recommended.

For available recording times for different discs under different

recording modes, see “Recording modes and approximate

recording times” (> 20).

You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL

disc on this unit.

Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.

≥Formatting and/or recording/initializing constraints may prevent

you from playing or recording certain discs.

≥Please see specifications (> 80) for compatible disc versions and

recording speeds.

When playing DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) and

+R DL (Double Layer, single-sided)

DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) and +R DL (Double Layer,

single-sided) discs have two writable layers on one side. If there is

not enough space on the first layer to record a programme, the

remainder is recorded on the second layer. When playing a title

recorded on both layers, the unit automatically switches between

layers and plays the title in the same way as a normal programme.

However, video and audio may momentarily cut out when the unit

is switching layers.

∫ Recording format

This unit records video in the following formats.

DVD Video Recording format [HDD] [RAM]

This is a recording method which allows you to record and edit

television broadcasts and so on.

≥You can delete unwanted parts of a title, create playlists, etc.

≥The broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” can be

recorded to a CPRM compatible disc.

DVD-R DL

When switching layers:

Video and audio may momentarily cut

+R DL

DVD-Video format [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]

This recording method is the same as commercially available DVD-

Video.

≥The broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” cannot be

recorded even if using a CPRM compatible disc.

≥After finalising the disc, you can play the disc on DVD players and

other equipment.

Second recordable layer

The available space

First recordable layer

+VR (+R/+RW Video Recording) format [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

This is a method for recording moving pictures to +R/+RW discs.

You can playback such discs recorded in this method in a similar

way as contents recorded in the DVD-Video format.

≥The broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” cannot be

recorded.

Title 1

Title 2

(Inner section of

(Outer section

of the disc)

Playback direction

the disc)

≥After finalising the disc or creating the top menu, you can play the

disc on DVD players and other equipment.

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Play-only discs

Disc type

Logo

Standard symbol

Uses

High quality movie and music discs

DVD-Video

[DVD-V]

DVD-RW (DVD

Video

Recording

format)

[-RW‹VR›]

DVD-RW video recorded on another DVD recorder

≥You can play programmes that allow One time only recording if they

have been recorded onto a CPRM compatible disc.

≥

By formatting (

57) the disc, you can record onto it in DVD-Video format.

It may be necessary to finalise the disc on the equipment used for recording.

DVD-R

DVD-R DL

DivX/MP3/WMA/ ≥DVD-R and DVD-R DL with video recorded in DivX

JPEG

≥DVD-R and DVD-R DL with music recorded in MP3/WMA

≥DVD-R and DVD-R DL with still pictures recorded in JPEG

Recorded audio and music (including CD-R/RW^§)

[CD]

–

DivX/MP3/WMA/ ≥CD-R and CD-RW with video recorded in DivX

JPEG

≥CD-R and CD-RW with music recorded in MP3/WMA

≥CD-R and CD-RW with still pictures recorded in JPEG

≥Recorded music and video (including CD-R/RW^§)

Video CD

[VCD]

Close the session after recording. Play may be impossible on some discs due to the condition of the recording.

≥The producer of the disc can control how discs are played. So you may not always be able to control play as described in these operating

instructions. Read the disc’s instructions carefully.

≥Operation and sound quality of CDs that do not conform to CD-DA specifications (copy control CDs, etc.) cannot be guaranteed.

Types of disc or title recorded on HDD

for the type of connected TV

Discs that cannot be played

≥2.6 and 5.2 GB DVD-RAM, 12 cm

≥3.95 and 4.7 GB DVD-R for Authoring

≥DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL recorded on another unit

and not finalised (> 81).

≥Discs recorded with AVCHD format.

≥DVD-Video with a region number other than “4” or “ALL”

≥DVD-Audio

≥Blu-ray, HD DVD

≥DVD-ROM, +R (8 cm), CD-ROM, CDV, CD-G, Photo CD, CVD,

SVCD, SACD, MV-Disc, PD, etc.

When you use the discs recorded either PAL or NTSC, or playback a

title recorded on HDD using PAL or NTSC, refer to this table.

(≤: Possible to view, –: Impossible to view)

TV type

Disc/Titles recorded

on HDD

Yes/No

Multi-system TV

PAL

NTSC

PAL

≤

PAL TV

≤

^§1(PAL60)

NTSC

PAL

≤

NTSC TV

–

§2

NTSC

≤

§1

If your television is not equipped to handle PAL 525/60 signals

the picture will not be shown correctly.

Select “NTSC” in “TV System” (> 63).

§2

≥When playing back a disc or title recorded on the HDD, ensure that

you match the “TV System” setting to the disc or title (PAL or

NTSC) (> 63).

USB memory information

Compatible USB memories

USB memories which are defined as USB mass storage class, and digital cameras that use PTP protocol:

–USB memories that support USB 1.0/1.1 and USB 2.0 Full Speed/High Speed.

≥USB memories of up to 128 GB can be used.

≥USB memories that support bulk only transfer.

CBI (Control/Bulk/Interrupt) is not supported.

≥Digital Cameras which require additional programme installation when connected to a PC are not supported.

≥MTP (Media Transport Protocol) device is not supported.

≥A multi-port USB card reader is not supported.

Format

FAT16 and FAT32 file systems are supported.

≥UDF/NTFS/exFAT file system is not supported.

≥Depending on the sector size, some files may not work.

≥Only the first partition on USB memories with multi-partition is supported.

Indicated in these instructions by [USB]

Data that can be played or copied

File format

(≤: Possible, –: Impossible)

DivX

≤

MP3/WMA

Still pictures (JPEG)

Playing

≤

Copying to HDD

–

Instructions

You can play DivX files recorded You can play and copy to HDD MP3/ You can play and copy to HDD or DVD-

with a computer onto the USB

WMA files recorded with a computer RAM still pictures recorded with a computer

onto the USB memory ( 31, 52). onto the USB memory ( 32, 51).

memory (> 30).

≥Despite meeting the conditions mentioned above, there may be USB memories that cannot be used for this unit.

≥If a Panasonic digital video camera with HDD etc. is connected to this unit’s USB port, you can copy the SD Video recorded with the camera to

this unit’s HDD or DVD-RAM.

RQT9306

Note

≥This unit’s USB port does not support bus-powered USB device.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Regarding DivX^®files, Music files and still pictures (JPEG)

[-R] [-R]DL] [CD]

DivX

≥Compatible formats: ISO9660 level 1 or 2 (except for extended

formats) and Joliet

Playable

media

[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]

≥This unit is compatible with multi-session/border (except for DVD-

R DL), but reading or play of the disc may take time if there are a

lot of sessions.

≥Operation may take time to complete when there are many files

(tracks) and/or folders (groups or albums) and some files (tracks)

may not display or be playable.

File format

DivX

≥Files must have the extension

“.DIVX”, “.divx”, “.AVI” or “.avi”.

≥English alphabet and Arabic numerals are displayed correctly.

Other characters may not be displayed correctly.

≥The display order on this unit may differ from how the order is

displayed on a computer.

≥Depending on how you create the disc (writing software), files

(tracks) and folders (groups or albums) may not play in the order

you numbered them.

≥This unit is not compatible with packet-write format.

≥Depending on the recording conditions, the disc may not be

played.

≥This unit is not compatible with copy-protected, Lossless,

Professional, Voice and Multiple Bit Rate (MBR) for WMA.

≥This unit is not compatible with WMA files protected with digital

rights management (DRM).

Number of

folders

Maximum number of folders recognizable: 300

folders

(including the root folder)

Maximum number of files recognizable^§1: 200 files

Number of

files

Support

version

Certified to the DivX Home Theater Profile.

Video

–Number of stream: Up to 1

–Codec: DIV3, DIV4, DIVX, DV50

–Picture size: 32 x 32 to 720 x 576

–FPS (Frame Per Second): Up to 30 fps

Audio

–Number of stream: Up to 8

–Format: MP3, MPEG, Dolby Digital

–Multi channel: Dolby Digital is possible. MPEG

multi is 2 ch conversion.

[HDD] [RAM]

≥Compatible formats: DCF^§4compliant (Content recorded on a

digital camera, etc.)

§4

Design rule for Camera File system: unified standard established

MP3/WMA

by Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries

Association (JEITA).

Playable

media

[HDD] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]

∫ Structure of folders displayed by this unit

File format

MP3

You can play Music files (MP3/WMA) and still pictures (JPEG)

on this unit by making folders as shown below. However

depending on the method of writing data (writing software),

play may not be in the order you numbered the folders.

≥Files must have the extension “.mp3” or “.MP3”.

WMA (Windows Media-formatted file)

≥Files must have the extension “.wma” or “.WMA”.

Number of

folders

(groups or

albums)

Maximum number of folders (groups or albums)

recognizable: 300 folders (groups or albums)

(including the root folder)

Structure of WMA/MP3

folders

[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]

Prefix with 3-digit numbers in

the order you want to play

them.

e.g. Structure of MP3 folders

Root

(folder=group)

001

Maximum number of files (tracks) recognizable^§1

3000 files (tracks)

001

Number of

files (tracks)

(file=track)

001.mp3

002.mp3

003.mp3

Bit rates

(MP3)

32 kbps to 320 kbps

≥The file name extension of

002

WMA files will be “.wma”.

001.mp3

002.mp3

003.mp3

004.mp3

003

Sampling

frequency

(MP3)

16 kHz/22.05 kHz/24 kHz/32 kHz/44.1kHz/48 kHz

001.mp3

002.mp3

003.mp3

For WMA

This unit is compatible with Windows Media Audio 9

(WMA9).

Order of play

Structures of still picture folders

[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]

ID3 tags

WMA tags

compatible ([HDD] [USB])

Files inside a folder are

displayed in the order they

were updated or taken.

Root

P0000001.jpg

P0000002.jpg

≥If there is a large amount of still picture data etc. within a MP3/

WMA file, play may not be possible.

002 Folder

Still pictures (JPEG^§2

)

P0000003.jpg

P0000004.jpg

P0000005.jpg

Playable

media

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]

003 Folder

File format

File format: JPEG

≥Files must have the extension “.jpg” or “.JPG”.

P0000006.jpg

P0000007.jpg

P0000008.jpg

P0000009.jpg

Number of

pixels

Between 34k34 and 6144k4096

(Sub sampling is 4:2:2 or 4:2:0)

004 Folder

P0000010.jpg

P0000011.jpg

P0000012.jpg

Order of play

Number of

folders^§3

[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] Maximum number of folders

recognizable: 300 folders (including the root folder)

[HDD] [RAM] This unit can handle a maximum of 300

folders

[RAM]

The following

can be displayed on this unit.

¢¢¢: Numbers XXX: Letters

Number of

files^§3

[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] Maximum number of files

recognizable^§1: 3000 files

[HDD] [RAM] This unit can handle a maximum of 3000

files

§1

Still pictures on the root

Root

ꢁ1

folder can also be

displayed.

Folders can be created

XXXXꢀꢀꢀꢀ.JPG

JPEG

§2

DCIMꢀꢀꢀ

on other equipment.

However, these folders

cannot be selected as a

copying destination.

MOTION

JPEG

Not supported

ꢀꢀꢀXXXXX

PROGRESSIVE

JPEG

XXXXꢀꢀꢀꢀ.JPG

≥If a folder name or file

name has been input using

other equipment, the name

may not be displayed

properly or you may not be

able to play or edit the

data.

§1

Total number of recognizable file including MP3, WMA, JPEG,

DivX and other types of files is 4000.

It may take a few moments for still pictures to display.

When there are many files and/or folders, some files may not

display or be playable.

ꢁ2

DCIM

§2

ꢀꢀꢀXXXXX

XXXXꢀꢀꢀꢀ.JPG

§3

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Media handling (Disc/USB memory)

Inserting discs

Disc care

1 Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] to open the tray.

∫ How to hold a disc

Do not touch the recorded surface.

∫ Cartridge disc

Insert label-up with the arrow

facing in.

Insert label-up.

DO NOT

∫ Concerning non-cartridge discs

Be careful about scratches and dirt.

Insert fully.

2 Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] to close the tray.

∫ If there is dirt or condensation on the disc

Automatic drive select function

Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.

[RAM] [Only for discs with the write-protect tab on the cartridge set to

“PROTECT” (> 56, Cartridge-protection)]

[DVD-V] [VCD]

DO NOT

≥If the unit is recording to the HDD or stopped, it automatically

switches to the DVD drive when a disc is inserted.

≥If you eject a disc and close the disc tray, the HDD drive is

automatically selected.

∫ Handling precautions

≥Do not attach labels or stickers to discs. (This may cause disc

warping and un-balanced rotation, rendering it unusable.)

≥Write on the label side of the disc only with a soft, oil-based felt

pen. Do not use ballpoint pens or other hard writing implements.

≥Do not use record cleaning sprays, benzine, thinner, static

electricity prevention liquids or any other solvent.

≥Do not use scratch-proof protectors or covers.

≥Do not drop stack, or impact discs. Do not place objects on them.

≥Do not use the following discs:

Note

≥When using 8 cm DVD-RAM, or 8 cm DVD-R, remove the disc

from the cartridge.

≥[RAM] It is not possible to record or play continuously from one side

of a double sided disc to the other. You will need to eject the disc

and turn it over.

≥[RAM] When using cartridge discs with the write-protect tab in the

protect position (> 56), play automatically starts when inserted in

the unit.

–Discs with exposed adhesive from removed stickers or labels

(rental discs, etc.).

–Discs that are badly warped or cracked.

Inserting, removing the USB memory

–Irregularly shaped discs, such as heart

shapes.

DO NOT

Inserting the USB memory

≥Before inserting any USB memory to

this unit, ensure that the data stored

therein has been backed up.

≥Check the orientation of the USB

connector and insert it straight in.

≥Insert an USB device while the unit is

stopped, so the “USB device” screen is

displayed. Select an item and press

[OK] to switch to the USB-related operations (> 30, 51).

Removing the USB memory

≥Complete all USB-related operations and pull the USB memory

straight out.

≥Do not place in the following areas:

–In direct sunlight.

–In very dusty or humid areas.

–Near a heater.

–Locations susceptible to significant difference in temperature

(condensation can occur).

–Where static electricity or electromagnetic waves occur.

≥To protect discs from scratches and dirt, return them to their cases

or cartridges when you are not using them.

≥If a USB memory being accessed is pulled out, then the data may

be damaged.

The manufacturer accepts no responsibility and offers no

compensation for loss of recorded or edited material due to a

problem with the unit or recordable media, and accepts no

responsibility and offers no compensation for any

subsequent damage caused by such loss.

Examples of causes of such losses are

≥A disc recorded and edited with this unit is played in a DVD

Recorder or computer disc drive manufactured by another

company.

≥A disc used as described above and then played again in this

unit.

≥A disc recorded and edited with a DVD Recorder or computer

disc drive manufactured by another company is played in this

unit.

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic operations

Watching analogue and digital broadcasts

This DVD recorder has a tuner which allows it to

directly receive and record analogue and digital

terrestrial channels.

Digital channel information

While stopped

Press [STATUS ] to show the information

screen.

Progress of the current

programme

Programme

name

REC

Signal Quality (> below)

Current time

Station Name

Channel

Other video equipment

The following screen appears.

DV Auto Rec

DV unit is connected.

Record from the DV unit ?

Connect to Audio/Video output terminals.

If the audio output of the other equipment is monaural

Rec to HDD

Rec to DVD

Cancel

Connect to L/MONO on the AV3 input terminals at the front.

§1

The S VIDEO terminal achieves a more vivid picture than the

SELECT

VIDEO terminal.

Connect to terminals of the same colour.

RETURN

§2

≥When the screen is not displayed

After performing step 1

When recording from the unit’s DV terminal

≥Select the type of audio recording from “Audio Mode for DV Input”

in the Setup menu (> 62).

≥When recording from DV equipment (e.g., digital video

camcorder), you can record audio/video recordings from DV tape

only.

≥When “Rec for High Speed Copy” (> 61) is set to “On” and you

make a copy, the copy will be made using the picture size selected

in “Aspect for Recording” (> 61) of the Setup menu.

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and press [OK].

Press [3, 4] to select “DV Auto Rec” and press [OK].

> Go to step 3 (> below)

2 Press [2, 1] to select “Rec to HDD”

About the aspect when recording a programme (> 19)

or “Rec to DVD” and press [OK].

Note

≥If it becomes time for a timer recording to start while copying, the

recording will start and the copying will stop.

≥If video is copied from another piece of equipment to this unit, then

the video quality will be degraded.

3 Press [REC MODE] to select the

recording mode.

4 Press [2, 1] to select “Rec.” and

Manual recording

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]

press [OK].

Recording starts.

Preparation

≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.

≥Press [REC MODE] to select the recording mode.

≥When recording bilingual programmes (> 19, Notes for recording)

≥When the output signal from the external equipment is NTSC,

change the “TV System” to “NTSC” in the Setup menu (> 63).

This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have

PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can

be recorded onto the HDD.)

When recording finishes

The confirmation screen appears. Press [OK] to finish DV automatic

recording.

To stop recording

Press [∫].

Note

≥Only one piece of DV equipment (e.g., digital video camcorder)

can be connected to the unit via the DV input terminal.

≥To reduce noise in input from a video cassette recorder, set “Input

NR” to “On” in the on-screen menu (> 54).

≥Check the time on the unit is correct.

≥

It is not possible to operate the unit from the connected DV equipment.

≥The DV input on this unit is for use with DV equipment only. (It

cannot be connected to a computer, etc.)

While stopped

≥The DV equipment name may not be shown correctly.

≥Depending on the DV equipment, the images or audio may not be

input properly.

≥The date and time information on the tape of the DV equipment will

not be recorded.

Press [INPUT SELECT] to select the

input channel for the equipment you

have connected.

≥You cannot record and play simultaneously.

e.g., If you have connected to AV3 input terminals, select

“AV3”.

If the DV automatic recording function does not work properly,

check the connections and DV equipment settings, and turn the

unit off and back on.

If that does not work, follow the instructions for manual

recording (> left).

2 Start play on the other equipment.

When you want to start recording

Press [¥ REC].

Recording starts.

To skip unwanted parts

Press [;] to pause recording. (Press again to restart recording.)

To stop recording

Press [∫].

Almost all videos and DVD-Video on sale have been treated to

prevent illegal copying. Any software that has been so treated

cannot be recorded using this unit.

≥Using Flexible Recording (> 21), you can record the content of a

video cassette (approx. 1–8 hours) to a 4.7 GB disc with the best

possible quality of recording without wasting disc space.

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced timer recording

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]

≥You can enter up to 32 programmes up to a month in advance.

Manually programming timer

recordings

(Each daily or weekly programme is counted as one programme.)

[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]

≥To use a new disc, formatting is necessary.

1 Press [PROG/CHECK].

Preparation

≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to

suit the connections to this unit.

≥If recording to DVD, insert a disc that you can use for recording

(> 10, 13).

≥Make sure that the clock settings are correct (> 64).

1:58 SP

Timer

Remain

HDD 30:24 SP DVD

TUE 14.10.09. 12:54:00

Recording

HDD

Drive

No. Channel Date

Start

Stop DVD Mode

space

New Timer Programme

Using G-CODE system to make timer

recordings (Analogue broadcast only)

2 Press [3, 4] to select “New Timer

Programme” and press [OK].

G-code is a registered trademark of

Gemstar Development Corporation. The

G-CODE system is manufactured under

license from Gemstar Development

Corporation.

3 Press [1] to move through the items

and change the items with [3, 4].

1:58 SP

Timer

Remain

HDD 30:24 SP DVD

TUE 14.10.09. 12:54:00

Recording

Entering G-CODE numbers is an easy way of timer recording. You

can find these numbers in TV listings in newspapers or magazines.

HDD

Channel Date

Start

Stop

Mode

DVD

HDD SP

ARD 15. 7.TUE

22:00

22:30

All Channels : ARD

Note

Programme Name

The G-CODE system is not supported for digital broadcasts.

≥When “Channel” is selected, you can press the “Blue” button

to change the category [e.g., Free TV, Radio, Favourite

(> 59)] and then press [3, 4] to select the channel you

want to record.

≥Press and hold [3, 4] to alter the Start (Start time) and Stop

(Finish time) in 30-minute increments.

1 Press [G-Code].

1:58 SP

HDD 30:24 SP DVD

G-Code

Record

Remain

TUE 14.10.09. 12:53:00

≥You can also set Channel (Programme position/TV Station

Name), Date, Start (Start time), and Stop (Finish time) with

the numbered buttons.

Input G-Code Number 0-9, and press OK.

≥Date

[. Date:

Daily timer:

Current date up to one month later minus

one day

2 Press the numbered buttons to enter

SUN-SAT>MON-SAT>MON-FRI

the G-CODE number.

Press [2] to move back to correct a digit.

a. Weekly timer: SUN>--->SAT

3 Press [OK].

Titles recorded using the same daily or weekly timer are

bundled and displayed as a “group” in the

DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen (> 29) except when using

Auto Renewal Recording.

1:58 SP

Timer

Remain

HDD 30:24 SP DVD

TUE 14.10.09. 12:53:00

Recording

HDD

Channel Date

Start

Stop

Mode

≥You can also press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the recording

drive.

DVD

HDD

ARD 15. 7.TUE

16:00

17:00

When the recording drive is “DVD” and there is not enough

remaining space, recording automatically switches to the

“HDD” (> 24, Relief Recording).

≥You can also press [REC MODE] to change the recording

mode.

All Channels : ARD

Programme Name

≥Confirm the programme (start and end time) by using a TV

magazine, etc. and make corrections if necessary using

[3, 4, 2, 1] (> right column, step 3).

≥[HDD] RENEW (Auto Renewal Recording) (> 24)

ON!)OFF

≥When “-- ---” appears in the “Channel” column, you cannot

set timer recording. Press [3, 4] to select desired

programme position. After you have entered the information

of a TV station, it is kept in the unit’s memory.

≥Programme Name

Press [2, 1] to select “Programme Name” and press [OK].

(> 44, Entering text)

4 Press [OK].

The timer programme is stored and the timer icon is

displayed.

The timer programme is stored and the timer icon is

displayed.

No. Channel

Timer icon



ARD

Timer icon



ARD

“F” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording

standby has been activated.

TUE 14.10.09. 12:56:00

HDD

Drive

HDD

Drive

Stop

17:00

Mode

space

DVD

Check to make sure “OK” is

displayed (> 25).

Stop

22:30

Mode

space

DVD

HDD

Check to make sure “OK” is

displayed (> 25).

HDD

rogramme

ogramme

Repeat steps 1–4 to programme other recordings.

Press [Í] to turn the unit off.

Repeat steps 2–4 to programme other recordings.

Press [Í] to turn the unit off.

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced timer recording

To cancel recording when recording

has already begun

Relief Recording

When the recording drive is “DVD” and there is not enough

remaining space, recording automatically switches to the “HDD”. If

there is no disc in the tray or the disc cannot be recorded on or when

timer recording starts while copying, the recording drive will be

altered to the HDD.

While the unit is on

Press [∫].

Stop Recording

≥The DIRECT NAVIGATOR shows which programmes were relief-

recorded (“ ” is displayed.) (> 29).

≥If the time remaining on the HDD is insufficient, as much of the

programme as possible will be recorded onto the HDD.

Timer recording in progress.

Stop this timer recording ?

It will be cancelled if you stop.

Cancel

Stop Recording

SELECT

Auto Renewal Recording

RETURN

[HDD]

If you record a programme onto HDD repeatedly everyday or every

week using timer recording, the unit will record the new programme

over the old one.

This function can be used only when daily or weekly timer

recording is selected.

2 Press [2, 1] to select “Stop

Recording” and press [OK].

If you stop a timer recording, it will be cancelled. However, if

you have set a daily or weekly timer recording, the recording

will start from the next time the timer recording is set.

1 Press [PROG/CHECK].

To release the unit from recording

standby

Even when the unit is turned off, you can display the timer recording

list by pressing [PROG/CHECK].

2 Press [3, 4] to select the programme

and press [OK].

3 Press [2, 1] to select “RENEW”

column.

1 Press [PROG/CHECK].

4 Press [3, 4] to select “ON” and press

2 Press [3, 4] to select the programme

[OK].

and press the “Red” button.

1:58 SP

TUE 14.10.09. 12:53:00

Timer

Remain

HDD 30:24 SP DVD

Recording

≥The timer icon “F” (> 25) disappears from the timer

recording list.

HDD

DVD

RENEW

Channel Date

ARD

SUN

Start

Stop

Mode

≥You cannot cancel timer recording standby mode as long as

even one timer icon “F” (> 25) remains in the timer

recording list.

22:00

22:30

HDD

All Channels : ARD

Programme Name

≥Press the “Red” button again to activate timer recording

standby.

Note

≥If a programme set for Auto Renewal Recording is protected or

while play back is taking place from the HDD, or while copying, the

programme will not be overwritten. Instead the programme set for

recording will be saved as a separate programme, and this

programme will be the one to be overwritten when the next Auto

Renewal Recording takes place.

≥Playlists made from programmes that were set for Auto Renewal

Recording are deleted along with auto renewal.

≥When there is not enough space on the HDD, the programme may

not be recorded completely.

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Notes on timer recording

Check, change or delete a programme

≥A disc with different TV system may not be played with the setting

as is, only when recording or on standby for the timer recording.

In this case, you will be able to playback by changing the “TV

System” settings. But to prevent the failure of the timer recording,

change back the settings before the recording starts. (> 63)

≥Timer recordings are activated regardless of whether the unit is

turned on/off.

≥Even when the unit is turned off, you can display the timer

recording list by pressing [PROG/CHECK].

Press [PROG/CHECK].

1:58 SP

HDD 30:24 SP DVD

Timer

Remain

Recording

TUE 14.10.09. 12:54:00

≥Timer recordings begin when the set time is reached even when

playing.

≥Timer recordings do not begin while editing or copying in normal

speed mode (> 45).

HDD

Drive

No. Channel Date

Start

Stop DVD

Mode

space

New Timer Programme

≥If the unit is turned on when timer recording begins, it remains

turned on after recording finishes. It does not turn off automatically.

You can turn the unit off during timer recording.

≥When you programme successive timer recordings to start

immediately one after the other, the unit cannot record the part at

the beginning of the later programmes.

Press OK to store new programme.

RETURN

Programme

A Icons

Programme

Not recorded

[

Timer recording standby is activated.

This programme is currently recording.

Programmes are overlapped. Recording of the programme

with the later start time starts when the earlier programme

finishes recording.

Recorded

You stopped a daily or weekly timer recording. The icon

disappears the next time the timer programme starts

recording.

The disc was full so the programme failed to record.

The programme was copy-protected so it was not recorded.

The programme did not complete recording because the disc

is dirty or some other reason.

Timer programmes set to Auto Renewal Recording (> 24).

Titles that have been rerouted to the HDD

(Displayed while recording.)

HDD Recording drive is set to HDD

DVD Recording drive is set to DVD

B Message displayed in the “Drive space” line

OK: Displayed if the recording can fit in the remaining

space.

> (Date): For recordings made daily or weekly, the display will

show until when recordings can be made (up to a

maximum of one month from the present time) based

on the time remaining on the disc.

! : It may not be possible to record because:

≥there is not enough space left.

≥the number of possible titles has reached its

maximum.

≥programmes are overlapped.

≥you stopped a daily or weekly timer recording.

Relief: Timer programmes that will be relief recorded to the

HDD.

C Channel name, programme name and other

information are displayed.

∫ To change a programme

Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press [OK]. (> 23,

right column, step 3)

∫ To delete a programme

Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press [DELETE ¢].

You can also delete a programme with the following steps

Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press [OPTION].

Press [3, 4] to select “Delete” and press [OK].

∫ To exit the timer recording list

Press [PROG/CHECK].

Note

≥Programmes that failed to record are deleted from the timer

recording list at 4 a.m. two days later.

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced timer recording

∫ When the TV Guide displays “No information

available for analogue channels” or the empty

TV Guide list

Operations in the TV Guide system

Press [GUIDE] to switch between Landscape view and Portrait

view.

Wed 13.10.09 12:53

All Channels

TV Guide:

Wed 13.10

Landscape

Landscape view

All Types

Wed 13.10.09 12:53

All Channels

TV Guide:

Wed 13.10

Landscape

Emmerdale : In today’s show we will...

All Types

Time:

Emmerdale : In today’s show we will...

The “empty” field

Time:

Emmerdale

≥Some digital broadcast may not send programme information.

Set the timer recording manually or with the G-CODE system

(> 23).

Emmerdale

+24 hours

OPTION: Free Word Search

info

Prog.Type

Favourite

Page

Selecting the programme from the

desired programme type or category

SELECT

RETURN

Guide Change Display Mode

Page

This function lets you display a TV Guide list sorted by programme

type (e.g. Movies, Sport) or category (e.g. Free TV, Radio).

Portrait view

Wed 13.10.09 12:53

All Channels

TV Guide: Portrait

From the desired programme type

All Types

Wed 13.10

13 Channel 4+1

13 Channel 4

Press the “Yellow” button to display

14 More 4

16 E4

15 ITV 4

19 30 20 00

Hollyoaks

the list of programme type.

20 00 20 55

Channel 4 News

3 Minute Wonder

How to Look Good Naked

The Secret Millionaire

Love Trap

From the desired category

20 55 21 00

21 00 22 00

Press the “Blue” button to display the

list of categories.

22 00 23:00

23:0

00:05

+24 hours

Prog.Type

Favourite

Page

2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired

SELECT

RETURN

OPTION: Free Word Search

info

Guide Change Display Mode

Page

item.

All Types

All Channels

∫ To change channels

Landscape view

Press [3, 4] to select a channel.

All Types

Movie

News

All Channels

Free TV

Radio

Entertainment

Portrait view

Favourite 1

Press [2, 1] to select a channel.

3 Press [OK].

The TV Guide list appears for this channel.

≥A list appears with all programmes of the selected item.

∫ To view a programme list for another day

≥Jump ahead 24 hours

Press the “Green” button to jump ahead by one day.

≥Jump back 24 hours

≥When you select the Landscape view, the unit displays

programmes in grey that do not belong to the selected

programme type.

Press the “Red” button.

You can only jump back to the current date. Past information

cannot be viewed.

Wed 13.10.09 12:53

All Channels

TV Guide:

Wed 13.10

Landscape

e.g.,

News

Programme

type, “News” is

selected in

step 2 of

Emmerdale : In today’s show we will...

Time:

∫ To browse through the TV Guide list

Press [W X CH].

Emmerdale

Landscape view.

∫ To see programme information

(Programmes with the

symbol)

Press [STATUS ].

Additional information (programme name, programme duration,

broadcast time, description) is available for these programmes.

+24 hours

OPTION: Free Word Search

info

Prog.Type

Favourite

Page

SELECT

RETURN

Guide Change Display Mode

Page

TV Guide

Tue 14.10.09 19:45

Wed 15.10.

Note

Spending Other People’s Money

ABC ONE, Lifestyle

The broadcasters allocate individual programmes to topic areas.

This function does not work properly unless the information which

distinguishes the programme type and categories sent from

broadcast stations is correct.

19:30-20:00. 30min.

flashy car salesman loses his cool when stingy friend

takes over his wallet. He’s lorced to sell his possessions

at car boot sale to pay for food.

4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the

TIMER REC

RETURN

programme and press [OK].

Return to List

When “Timer Recording” screen appears. (> 17, Timer

recording, step 3)

Press [3, 4] to scroll up and down.

To show other pages

Press [CH W] (Previous) or [X CH] (Next).

When “Selection Screen” screen appears.

– “View” > 14, Watching analogue and digital broadcasts

– “Rec.” > 17, Timer recording

Press [STATUS ] again to return to the programme list.

– “Delete” > Timer recordings can be cancelled.

Press [2, 1] to select ”Yes” and press [OK].

The timer icon disappears.

To return to the previous TV Guide list before you have selected

the programme type or categories

Select “All Types” of the programme type and “All Channels” of the

categories in step 2 above.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Searching using programme information of titles

recorded to the HDD

Searching for the programme in the TV

Guide

You can search programmes from the TV Guide based on title

information.

[HDD]

You can search for programmes using programme information of

titles recorded to the HDD.

Searching by entering words

Preparation

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.

By entering words, you can search for programmes from the TV

Guide using the programme information.

During play or while stopped

1 Press [OPTION].

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the “Red” button to

select “VIDEO”.

2 Enter the word you would like to

search for and set.

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles

HDD

VIDEO

PICTURE

MUSIC

Entry method > 44, Entering text

Free Word Search

10.10.

11.10.

Chantal Show

Dolphines

Simplified Search

Detailed Search

Detailed Search may result in

many hits, but

search time will be longer.

Select Previous

Page 02/02

RETURN

OPTION

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Simplified

2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title.

Search” or “Detailed Search” and

press [OK].

3 Press [OPTION].

Simplified Search:

It searches the programme names only.

Detailed Search:

It searches all the information on the programmes. It might

take more time to search the desired programme.

4 Press [3, 4] to select “Find Titles”

and press [OK].

Edit

Find Titles

Create Group

Wed 13.10.09 12:53

TV Guide:

Portrait

Search results for “ROSEN”

Wed 13.10

1 ARD

2 ZDF

3 RTL

4 SAT1

5 Press [∫] (Set).

Wed 27.

12:00 - 12:30 Rote Rosen

15:00 - 15:15 Rote Rosen

17:00 - 18:00 Rote Rosen

15:00 - 15:15 Rote Rosen

≥When searching using a word other than the title name,

Fri 29.

enter a different word. (> 44, Entering text)

Search results appear.

6 Press [3, 4] to select “Simplified

4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the

Search” or “Detailed Search” and

press [OK].

programme and press [OK].

When “Timer Recording” screen appears. (> 17, Timer

recording, step 3)

≥Refer to “Searching for the programme in the TV Guide”

(> left) for more information about “Simplified Search” and

“Detailed Search”.

When “Selection Screen” screen appears.

–“View” > 14, Watching analogue and digital broadcasts

–“Rec.” > 17, Timer recording

7 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the

–“Delete” > Timer recordings can be cancelled.

programme and press [OK].

Press [2, 1] to select ”Yes” and press [OK].

The timer icon disappears.

When “Timer Recording” screen appears. (> 17, Timer

recording, step 3)

When “Selection Screen” screen appears.

–“View” > 14, Watching analogue and digital broadcasts

–“Rec.” > 17, Timer recording

To return to the previous screen^§

Press [RETURN ].

It may return to the TV Guide screen.

–“Delete” > Timer recordings can be cancelled.

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

Press [2, 1] to select ”Yes” and press [OK].

The timer icon disappears.

To return to the previous screen

If you press [RETURN ], the unit may return to the

DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen.

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced playback

1 Press [TIME SLIP].

Skipping

the

Operation during play

≥Depending on the media, some operations may not be possible.

2 Press [3, 4] to select the time

and press [OK].

specified

time (Time

Play skips the specified time.

≥Each time you press [3, 4], the time

increases [3] or decreases [4] by

1-minute intervals. (Press and hold for

10-minute intervals.)

Press [∫].

The stopped position is memorized.

Stop

Slip)

Resume play function

Press [1] (PLAY) to restart from this position.

[HDD] [RAM]

[-R] [-R]DL]

[-RW‹V›] [+R]

[+R]DL]

(This function

does not work

with finalised

discs.)

This automatically disappears after

approximately 5 seconds. To show the screen

again press [TIME SLIP] again.

Stopped position

≥If [∫] is pressed several times, the position is

cleared in some cases.

≥The position is cleared if the tray is opened.

≥[CD] [VCD] and MP3/WMA/DivX : The position

is cleared if the unit is turned off.

5 min

[+RW] [-RW‹VR›]

Press [;].

Press [;] again or [1] (PLAY) to restart play.

Pause

Press [6] or [5].

≥The speed increases up to 5 steps. ([+R]

[+R]DL] [+RW] up to 3 steps)

≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.

≥Audio is heard during first level search

forward.

Press [MANUAL SKIP].

Each time you press, play restarts

approximately 1 minute later.

Manual

Skip

[HDD] [RAM]

[-R] [-R]DL]

[-RW‹V›] [+R]

[+R]DL]

(This function

does not work

with finalised

discs.)

[CD] and MP3/WMA : Audio is heard during all

levels of search.

DivX : Audio is not heard during all levels of

search.

During play or while paused, press

Skip

[:] or [9].

Skip to the title, chapter or track you want to

play.

[+RW] [-RW‹VR›]

Press [CREATE CHAPTER].

Chapters are divided at the point pressed.

≥Press [:, 9] to skip to the start of a

chapter.

Create

≥Each press increases the number of skips.

≥DivX : Press [:] to return to the beginning

of the title currently playing.

Chapter

(> 38, Chapter)

Press the numbered buttons.

Play starts from the selected title, chapter or

track.

[HDD] [RAM]

Starting

from a

Changing audio during play

Press [AUDIO].

selected

≥[HDD]

e.g.,

5: [0] > [0] > [5]

15: [0] > [1] > [5]

title

[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD], DivX and analogue broadcast

≥MP3/WMA and JPEG

e.g.,

5: [0] > [0] > [0] > [5]

15: [0] > [0] > [1] > [5]

LR>L>R

^---------------}

HDD

PLAY

≥Other discs

Input a 2-digit number

e.g.,

5: [0] > [5]

15: [1] > [5]

L R

e.g., “L R” is selected

≥This works only when

stopped (the screen on the

[DVD-V]

You can change the audio channel number each time you press the

button. This allows you to change things like the soundtrack

language (> 54, Soundtrack).

right is displayed on the television) with some

discs.

≥[VCD] (with playback control)

If you press the numbered buttons while

stopped (the above screen is displayed on the

television) you can cancel PBC. (Elapsed play

time appears on the unit’s display.)

1 ENG

Digital 3/2.1ch

Soundtrack

e.g., English is selected.

Press and hold [1] (PLAY/a1.3).

Quick

Note

Play speed is quicker than normal.

View

You cannot change the audio type in the following cases.

≥When a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R

DL or +RW disc is in the disc tray while DVD drive is selected.

≥When the recording mode is XP and “Audio Mode for XP

Recording” is set to “LPCM” (> 62).

≥When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On” (The default setting

is “On” > 61).

≥Press again to return to normal speed.

[HDD] [RAM]

While paused, press [6] or [5].

Slow-

The speed increases up to 5 steps.

motion

≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.

≥[VCD] Forward direction [5] only.

≥The unit will pause if slow-motion play is

continued for approximately 5 minutes

[HDD] [RAM] [-R]

[-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]

[+R]

[+R]DL] [+RW]

(excluding [DVD-V] [VCD]).

[DVD-V]

[-RW‹VR›] [VCD]

While paused, press [2] (2;) or

Frame-by-

[1] (;1).

frame

Each press shows the next frame.

≥Press and hold to change in succession

[HDD] [RAM] [-R]

[-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]

forward or backward.

[+R]

≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.

[+R]DL] [+RW]

≥[VCD] Forward direction [1] (;1) only.

[DVD-V]

[-RW‹VR›] [VCD]

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Selecting recorded programmes (titles) to play—DIRECT NAVIGATOR

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]

You can quickly find the recorded titles and easily play them. You

can also sort the titles or edit the Groups of titles.

All Titles screen

Displays all titles.

DIRECT NAVIGATOR

All Titles

VIDEO

009

PICTURE

MUSIC

HDD

007

008

1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

ARD 10.10. FRI

- - -

ARD 11.10. SAT

- - -

ARD 18.10. SAT

- - -

[HDD] [RAM] When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the “Red”

button to select “VIDEO”.

2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title

Page 02/02

Select Previous

OPTION

RETURN

and press [OK].

(in Thumbnail Display)

You can also select titles with the numbered buttons (All Titles

screen only).

e.g., [HDD]

To sort the titles for easy searching

[HDD] (All Titles screen in Table Display only)

115: [1] > [1] > [5]

e.g., [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]

5: [0] > [5] 15: [1] > [5]

To show other pages

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press [OK].

(Thumbnail Display only)

≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.

[0] > [0] > [5]

15:

[0] > [1] > [5]

This function is convenient when searching for one title to playback

from many titles.

1 Press [OPTION].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Sort” and press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].

If you select an item other than “No.”

≥The DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen will reappear after playback

of the selected title has finished. (You cannot play titles

continuously.)

To exit the screen

≥Skip and Time Slip will only function with the title currently being

played back.

≥If you exit the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen, or switch to

another DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen, the sort will be

cancelled.

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen icons

[

Currently recording.

Title protected.

Title that was not recorded due to recording

protection (Digital broadcasts etc.)

To play grouped titles [HDD]

1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the group and press [OK].

Title cannot be played

[When copying a title to the HDD, or when data is

damaged etc.]

2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title and press [OK].

Titles that have been rerouted to the HDD

(> 24, Relief Recording)

To edit the group of titles [HDD]

[HDD] (Grouped Titles screen only)

Title with “One time only recording” restriction (> 81,

CPRM)

1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a title or a group and press [;].

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all

necessary titles.

Groups of titles ([HDD] only)

Title that was recorded but has not yet been played

([HDD] only)

≥Press [;] to cancel.

2 Press [OPTION].

3 Press [3, 4] to select the option and press

Create Group

Title recorded using a different encoding system from

that of the TV system currently selected on the unit.

≥Alter the “TV System” setting on this unit to suit

(> 63).

(NTSC)

(PAL)

Release Grouping

[OK].

Create Group:

Press [2, 1] to select “Create” and press [OK].

Selected titles are bundled to form a group.

Switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR

appearance

“Grouped Titles”/“All Titles” [HDD]

“Table Display”/“Thumbnail Display”

Release Grouping:

Press [2, 1] to select “Release” and press [OK].

≥When a group of titles has been selected, all the titles in the group

are released.

≥When a title in a group has been selected, the title is released from

the group.

1 While the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen is displayed

Press [OPTION].

2 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].

∫ Regarding the group name

The name of the first title in the group is used as the group name.

e.g.,

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles

HDD

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles

HDD

VIDEO

PICTURE

MUSIC

VIDEO

Table Display

“Table Display” or “Thumbnail Display”

All Titles

“Grouped Titles” or “All Titles” [HDD]

10.10.

Chantal Show

11.10.

Dolphins

ARD 11.10. SAT

Dolphins

ARD 18.10. SAT

Dolphins 2

PICTURE/MUSIC

Grouped Titles screen

Two or more titles recorded in the Daily/weekly timer recording mode

are bundled and displayed as one item.

Select Previous

Page 02/02

Page 01/01

Select

OPTION

RETURN

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles

HDD

To change the group name

VIDEO

PICTURE

MUSIC

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the group and press [OPTION].

Press [3, 4] to select “Edit” and press [OK].

Press [3, 4] to select “Enter Title Name” and press [OK].

10.10.

Chantal Show

11.10.

Dolphines

Enter the name. (> 44, Entering text)

≥Even if the group name is changed, the title names in the group will

not be changed.

Select Previous

Page 02/02

RETURN

OPTION

Note

(in Thumbnail Display)

This function is only available for Videos and not available for music

or still pictures.

Select the item marked with

bundled titles.

and press [OK] to display the

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Playing DivX, Music files and still pictures (JPEG)

Playing DivX video contents

Showing the menu screen

[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]

[-R] [-R]DL] [CD]

ABOUT DIVX VIDEO:

1 Insert the disc.

DivX^®is a digital video format created by DivX, Inc. This is an official

DivX Certified device that plays DivX video.

You can play DivX video contents recorded with a computer onto

DVD-R, DVD-R DL, CD-R/CD-RW and USB memory.

2 If the disc contains different file types

e.g., [CD]

Disc

Play Video ( DivX )

Play Pictures ( JPEG )

Play Music ( MP3&WMA )

Copy Music ( MP3&WMA )

1 Show DivX Menu screen.

(> left, Showing the menu screen)

DivX Menu

CD (DivX)

Folder1 : 0025

No.

001

Title Name

Tree

Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].

ABC.avi

002

003

004

DEF.avi

GHI.avi

JKL.avi

Otherwise,

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

[USB]

Page 001/001

Total Title : 004

1 Insert the USB memory.

RETURN

≥Files are treated as titles.

USB device

Play Video ( DivX )

Play Pictures ( JPEG )

2 Press [3, 4] to select the title and

Copy All Pictures ( JPEG )

Copy Pictures ( JPEG )

Play Music ( MP3&WMA )

Copy Music ( MP3&WMA )

Update CD database on HDD

press [OK].

Play starts on the selected title.

≥You can also select the title with the numbered buttons.

e.g.,

[0] > [0] > [5]

15:

[0] > [1] > [5]

You can also display this screen with the following steps.

1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Drive Select”, and press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select “USB”, and press [OK].

To stop playing

Press [∫].

To show other pages

Press [:, 9].

2 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].

To exit the screen

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

∫ Changing the file type to play

[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]

Note

1 Press [RETURN ] several times to exit the

menu.

2 Press [FUNCTION MENU].

≥Picture sizes set at the recording time may prevent the unit from

showing pictures in the adequate aspect. You may be able to

adjust the aspect through the TV.

≥Successive play is not possible.

≥Playback is not possible if recording is performed on the HDD drive

or the DVD drive.

FUNCTION MENU

CD(DivX)

Playback

Divx

Recording

Picture

Music

Using the tree screen to find a folder

Copy

TV Guide

Others

1 While the file list is displayed

Drive Select

Press [1] while a title is highlighted to display

the tree screen.

RETURN

F: Selected folder no./Total folder no. including DivX title.

[-R] [-R]DL] [CD]

Folder

DivX Menu

CD (DivX)

1/21

1Press [3, 4] to select “Playback” and press

12.02.2009

Image001

Image002

Image003

Image004

Image005

Image006

Image007

Image008

Image009

Image010

DATA1

[OK].

2Press [3, 4] to select file type and press

[OK].

You cannot select folders

that contain no compatible

files.

DATA2

[USB]

RETURN

1Press [3, 4] to select “Drive Select” and

press [OK].

2 Press [3, 4] to select a folder and press [OK].

2Press [3, 4] to select “USB” and press

The file list for the folder appears.

[OK].

3Press [3, 4] to select the item and press

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

[OK].

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Regarding DivX VOD content

Playing Music files

[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]

You can play MP3/WMA files recorded with a computer onto a DVD-

R, DVD-R DL, CD-R/CD-RW and USB memory.

≥You cannot play MP3 or WMA files on the USB memory while

recording or copying.

ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND:

This DivX^®Certified device must be registered in order to play DivX

Video-on-Demand (VOD) content.

First generate the DivX VOD registration code for your device and

submit it during the registration process. [Important: DivX VOD

content is protected by a DivX DRM (Digital Rights Management)

system that restricts playback to registered DivX Certified devices. If

you try to play DivX VOD content not authorized for your device, the

message “Authorisation Error.” will be displayed and your content

will not play.]

1 Show MP3&WMA Menu screen.

(> 30, Showing the menu screen)

Learn more at www.divx.com/vod.

Selected group

Display the unit’s registration code.

(> 64, “DivX Registration” in “Others” tab)

No.

Group

My favorite

MP3&WMA Menu

G: Group No.

T: Track No. in the group

TOTAL:

Track No./Total tracks in

all groups

Total

Track

Tree

DivX Registration

001 Both Ends Freezing

Setup

TOTAL

002 Lady Starfish

003 Life on Jupiter

004 Metal Glue

005 Paint ItYellow

006 Pyjamamama

007 Shrimps from Mars

008 Starperson

1/111

DivX (R) Video On Demand

Number

Tuning

–

8 alphanumeric characters

Your registration code is : XXXXXXXX

To learn more visit www.divx.com/vod

Disc

Prev.

Picture

Sound

Display

009 Velvet Cuppermine

≥Files are treated as tracks and folders are treated as groups.

2 Press [3, 4] to select the track and

press [OK].

Connection

Others

RETURN

≥After playing DivX VOD content for the first time, another

registration code is then displayed in “DivX Registration”. Do not

use this registration code to purchase DivX VOD content. If you

use this code to purchase DivX VOD content, and then play the

content on this unit, you will no longer be able to play any content

that you purchased using the previous code.

≥If you purchase DivX VOD content using a registration code

different from this unit’s code, you will not be able to play this

content. (“Authorisation Error.” is displayed.)

Play starts on the selected track.

≥“0” indicates the track currently playing.

≥You can also select the track with the numbered buttons.

e.g.,

[0] > [0] > [0] > [5]

[0] > [0] > [1] > [5]

15:

To stop playing

Press [∫].

Regarding DivX content that can only be played a set number of

times

Some DivX VOD content can only be played a set number of times.

When you play this content, the remaining number of plays is

displayed. You cannot play this content when the number of

remaining plays is zero. (“Rental Expired.” is displayed.)

To show other pages

Press [:, 9].

To exit the screen

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

Using the tree screen to find a group

When playing this content

≥The number of remaining plays is reduced by one if

– you press [Í].

– you press [∫].

– you press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

– you press [:] or [6, 5] etc. and arrive at another content

or the start of the content being played.

– timer recording starts on the HDD.

– you press [DRIVE SELECT] to change the drive.

≥Resume functions do not work.

1 While the file list is displayed

Press [1] while a track is highlighted to display

the tree screen.

Selected group No. /Total groups

If the group has no track, “– –” is displayed as group number.

MP3&WMA Menu

Tree

MP3 music

7/25

001 My favorite

001 Brazilian pops

002 Chinese pops

003 Czech pops

004 Hungarian pops

005 Liner notes

006 Japanese pops

007 Mexican pops

008 Philippine pops

009 Swedish pops

001 Momoko

TOTAL

40/111

Number

You cannot select

groups that contain no

compatible files.

–

SELECT

002 Standard number

001 Piano solo

RETURN

002 Vocal

2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a group and press

[OK].

The file list for the group appears.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Playing DivX, Music files and still pictures (JPEG)

∫ Regarding Album View screen

Still pictures copied from USB memories are grouped by the

shooting date in the HDD or DVD-RAM.

You can arrange these still pictures and create an album (> 42).

Playing still pictures

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]

[HDD] [RAM]

≥You can play still pictures recorded with a computer onto a DVD-R,

DVD-R DL, CD-R/CD-RW and USB memory.

≥You cannot play still pictures while recording or copying.

Grouped by date

002

1 Show Album View screen.

Total 68

Date: 10.10. 2009

[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]

(> 30, Showing the menu screen)

Number of pictures/Shooting date

[HDD] [RAM]

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]

Album

While stopped

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive.

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

002

When “PICTURE” is not selected, press the “Green”

button to select “PICTURE”.

10.10. 09

Zoological park

Total 24

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Album View

HDD

Album View screen

MUSIC

VIDEO

- - -

PICTURE

001

002

Shooting date/Number of pictures/Album name

Regarding Album View

screen > right

Total

Date: 1. 1.2006

Total

Date: 1. 2.2006

≥Depending on the digital camera, the editing software on the PC

etc., the information about the recording date may not be

displayed. In this case, the date will appear as [--.--.--].

- - -

Page 01/01

OPTION

Press OK to show

pictures.

Slideshow

RETURN

DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen icons

Picture and folder protected.

Album that has not yet been viewed ([HDD] [RAM])

To show other pages

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press

[OK].

≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.

2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the

album and press [OK].

You can also select album with the numbered buttons.

e.g.,

[0] > [0] > [5]

15: [0] > [1] > [5]

115: [1] > [1] > [5]

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Picture (JPEG) View

HDD

e.g., HDD

PICTURE

Album Name 103__DVD

0001

0005

0009

0002

0006

----

0003

0007

----

0004

0008

----

Page 001/001

Slideshow

OPTION

RETURN

3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still

picture and press [OK].

You can also select still pictures with the numbered buttons.

e.g.,

[0] > [0] > [0] > [5]

115: [0] > [1] > [1] > [5]

15: [0] > [0] > [1] > [5]

1115: [1] > [1] > [1] > [5]

≥Press [2, 1] to display the previous or next still picture.

≥Useful functions during still picture play (> 33)

To return to the Album View screen or Picture (JPEG) View

screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Useful functions during still picture play

You can display still pictures one by one at a constant interval.

Start

While the Album View screen is displayed

1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album.

2 Press [1] (PLAY).

You can also start Slideshow with the following steps.

While the Album View screen is displayed

1 Press [OPTION].

Slideshow

Setting

Start Slideshow

Slideshow Setting

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Slideshow Setting”and press [OK].

3 Set required settings and press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Set” and then press [OK].

4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the desired album and press [OPTION].

5 Press [3, 4] to select “Start Slideshow” and press [OK].

≥To change the display interval

Press [3, 4] to select “Display interval” in step 3.

Press [2, 1] to select the desired interval (“Normal”, “Long” or “Short”).

≥Repeat Play

Press [3, 4] to select “Repeat Play” in step 3.

Press [2, 1] to select “On” or “Off”.

∫ Slideshow with music

You can add music to Slideshow.

Slideshow Setting

Please set the following items.

Press [3, 4] to select “Soundtrack” in step 3 (> above).

Press [2, 1] to select “On”.

Press [3, 4] to select “Select Soundtrack” and press [OK].

Press [3, 4] to select the storage location of soundtrack and press [OK].

Press [3, 4] to select an album for soundtrack and press [OK].

Display interval

Repeat Play

Normal

Soundtrack

Select Soundtrack

Album001

CaSnectel

Set

SELECT

RETURN

Note

≥Music albums on HDD and on USB memory can be used as the slideshow

Soundtrack. However, when selecting still images on USB memory for the slideshow, music albums on the USB

memory cannot be used as the soundtrack. (Even if a music album on USB memory is selected, the music is not

played.)

While playing

Rotate RIGHT

Rotate LEFT

1 Press [OPTION].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Rotate RIGHT” or “Rotate LEFT” and press [OK].

Rotate RIGHT

Rotate LEFT

≥Rotation information will not be stored.

–[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] Still pictures

–When disc or album is protected

–When played on other equipment

–When copying pictures

–When changing date

While playing

Zoom in

Zoom out

1 Press [OPTION].

Rotate RIGHT

Rotate LEFT

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Zoom in” and press [OK].

Zoom in

≥To return the picture to its original size, press [3, 4] to select “Zoom out” in step 2 and press [OK].

≥When zooming in, the picture may be cut off.

≥The enlargement information will not be stored.

≥The “Zoom in/Zoom out” function is only available for still pictures smaller than 640 a 480 pixels.

While playing

e.g., HDD

Properties

18:53:50 11.10.

Folder - Picture No. 103 - 0006

Date 10. 10. 2009 No.

Press [STATUS

] twice.

3 / 9

To exit the picture properties screen

Press [STATUS ].

Shooting date

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Playing music

To play music CD

Useful functions during music play

Operations during play

Preparation

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.

Press [∫].

Stop

The stopped position is memorized.

Press [1] (PLAY) to restart from this position.

≥If [∫] is pressed several times, the position is

cleared.

1 Insert a music CD.

The menu is automatically displayed.

≥The position is cleared if the unit is turned off.

Press [;].

Pause

Play Music

Copy Music

Press [;] again or [1] (PLAY) to restart play.

Press [6] or [5].

The speed increases up to 5 steps.

Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.

SELECT

RETURN

During play or while paused, press [:] or

[9].

Skip to the track you want to play.

≥Each press increases the number of skips.

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Play Music”

Skip

and press [OK].

The unit starts accessing the Gracenote^®Database (> 52)

and searches for the title information.

You can select the item which you want to repeat.

Repeat

P O W E R E D B Y

Play

While playing

[HDD]

Press [OPTION].

Press [3, 4] to select “Repeat Play Setting”

and press [OK].

Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].

≥Select “Off” to cancel repeat play.

You can change the order of the Album View

alphabetically.

Sort

If search results indicate that multiple titles were found

Press [3, 4] to select the appropriate title and press [OK].

[HDD]

While Album View screen is displayed

3 Press [3, 4] to select the track and

Press [OPTION].

Press [3, 4] to select “Sort” and press [OK].

Press [3, 4] to select “Album Name” and

press [OK].

You can also select the track with the numbered buttons.

e.g.,

[0] > [5]

To cancel the sorted screen

Press [3, 4] to select “No.” and press [OK].

15: [1] > [5]

While Track View screen is displayed

Properties

Press [OPTION].

Press [3, 4] to select “Properties” and press

[OK].

To exit the screen

[HDD] [CD]

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

Playback continues.

≥To exit the Properties screen, press [OK].

To play music recorded on HDD

Copying music to HDD (> 52)

Preparation

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive

1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

When “MUSIC” is not selected, press the “Yellow” button to

select “MUSIC”.

2 Press [3, 4] to select the album and

press [OK].

You can also select the album with the numbered buttons.

e.g.,

[0] > [0] > [5]

115: [1] > [1] > [5]

15: [0] > [1] > [5]

3 Press [3, 4] to select the track and

press [OK].

You can also select the track with the numbered buttons.

e.g.,

[0] > [0] > [0] > [5]

115: [0] > [1] > [1] > [5]

15: [0] > [0] > [1] > [5]

1115: [1] > [1] > [1] > [5]

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

Note

≥You cannot play music tracks on HDD while recording or copying.

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Convenient functions

To pause the TV programme you are

watching—Pause Live TV

You can pause the TV programme you are watching using this unit’s

tuner and resume later by temporarily saving it on the HDD. This is

useful when you have to briefly stop watching TV to run an errand.

If you stop the Pause Live TV function, then the TV programme

temporarily saved on the HDD will be deleted.

FUNCTION MENU Display

By using the FUNCTION MENU Display you may access the main

functions quickly and easily.

If “FUNCTION MENU Display” is set to “On” in the Setup menu,

FUNCTION MENU automatically appears when you turn the power

on. (> 62)

1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].

Functions displayed depend on the selected drive or type of

disc.

1 Turn on the television and select the

appropriate AV input to suit the

connections to this unit.

FUNCTION MENU

HDD

Remain 30:00 SP

Playback

Recording

Delete

Video

Picture

Music

2 Turn on this unit and press [W X CH]

Copy

to select the channel.

TV Guide

Others

Drive Select

When you want to pause the TV programme

RETURN

Press [;].

HDD

2 Press [3, 4] to select a function and

ꢂ

DVB

ABC

press [OK].

FUNCTION MENU

HDD

Remain 30:00 SP

Playback

Recording

Delete

Video

Picture

Music

Copy

TV Guide

Others

This icon indicates that Pause Live TV is working. You can

turn off this icon (> 62, Pause Live TV Icon).

Drive Select

RETURN

When you want to resume

≥If you press [RETURN ], you can return to the previous

screen.

Press [1] (PLAY)

≥The programme is saved on the HDD in SP recording mode

(> 20) regardless of the recording mode and the drive

selected before starting saving.

3 Press [3, 4] to select an item and

press [OK].

≥At least 1 hour up to 8 hours of TV programmes can be

temporarily saved on the HDD. (This may vary depending

on the HDD free space.)

≥Refer to “Easy access to various functions — FUNCTION

MENU Display” about each function. (> 7)

Operation during Pause Live TV

To exit the FUNCTION MENU Display

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

Press [6, 5].

Pause

Press [;].

≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart.

Press and hold [1] (PLAY/a1.3).

≥Press again to return to the normal speed.

Quick View

While paused, press [6] or

Slow-

motion

[5].

The speed increases up to 5 steps.

≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.

1 Press [∫].

2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes”

and press [OK].

Stop Pause

Live TV

Note

≥The Pause Live TV function automatically stops when a timer

recording starts.

≥The Pause Live TV function does not work

–when the clock is not set

–while recording

–while timer recording

≥Audio cannot be switched during resume play.

≥The first 30 minutes is deleted every 30 minutes after the HDD is

full or the saving lasts 8 hours.

≥The Pause Live TV function stops automatically 24 hours after

started.

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI Control^TM”)

You can enjoy linked operations with the TV and receiver by using

“HDAVI Control”.

Preparation

Connect this unit to your TV using an HDMI cable or to your

receiver using an HDMI cable (> 67).

Set “VIERA Link” to “On” (> 63). (The default setting is “On”.)

Set the “HDAVI Control” operations on the connected equipment

(e.g., TV).

≥Set the input channel on VIERA to suit the terminal to be

What is VIERA Link “HDAVI Control”?

VIERA Link “HDAVI Control” is a convenient function that

offers linked operations of this unit, and a Panasonic TV

(VIERA) or receiver under “HDAVI Control”. You can use this

function by connecting the equipment with the HDMI cable.

See the operating instructions for connected equipment for

operational details.

≥VIERA Link “HDAVI Control”, based on the control functions

provided by HDMI which is an industry standard known as HDMI

CEC (Consumer Electronics Control), is a unique function that

we have developed and added. As such, its operation with other

manufacturers’ equipment that supports HDMI CEC cannot be

guaranteed.

used as “HDAVI Control”.

Turn on all “HDAVI Control” compatible equipment and select this

unit’s input channel on the connected TV so that the “HDAVI

Control” function works properly.

Also when the connection or settings are changed, repeat

this procedure.

≥This unit supports “HDAVI Control 4” function.

“HDAVI Control 4” is the newest standard (current as of

December, 2008) for Panasonic’s HDAVI Control compatible

equipment. This standard is compatible with Panasonic’s

conventional HDAVI equipment.

≥Please refer to individual manuals for other manufacturers’

equipment supporting VIERA Link function.

What you can do with “HDAVI Control”

Download from the TV^§1

When you connect the unit to a TV for the first time, the station list data etc. are automatically copied from the TV to the unit and the TV stations

are assigned to the programme positions on the unit in the same order as on the TV (> 9).

Easy playback

When the TV is on and the following operations are performed, the TV’s input will automatically switch to HDMI input mode and the TV displays

the corresponding action.

(Picture or sound may not be available for the first few seconds.)

Press [FUNCTION MENU]^§2, [1] (PLAY)^§3, [DIRECT NAVIGATOR], [GUIDE], [G-Code], [PROG/CHECK] etc.

Power on link

When the TV is off and the following operations are performed, the TV will automatically turn on and displays the corresponding action.

(Picture or sound may not be available for the first few seconds.)

Press [FUNCTION MENU]^§2, [1] (PLAY)^§3, [DIRECT NAVIGATOR], [GUIDE], [G-Code], [PROG/CHECK] etc.

≥[DVD-V] [CD] [VCD] and MP3/WMA

The TV is automatically turned on when you insert the discs.

Power off link

When you set the TV to standby mode, the unit is also automatically set to standby mode. The unit is automatically set to standby mode even if

the FUNCTION MENU screen etc. is displayed during playback or when the unit set to a timer recording.

Even if the TV is set to standby mode, the unit will not be set to standby mode at the same time when recording, copying, finalising etc.

≥When this unit is connected to an “HDAVI Control” compatible Panasonic receiver with an HDMI cable, the receiver will also turn off.

About the Standby Power Save function^§4

Even with “Power Save” set to “Off” (> 64) (Quick Start mode), this unit turns to “Power Save” states (> 9) when Power off link works, so it is

possible to reduce the power consumption while this unit is in standby mode.

≥“Standby Power Save” setting is required to be activated on the TV.

≥When turning this unit on or off without using Power off link function, this unit will not turn to “Power Save” states.

^§1This function is available with the TV that supports “HDAVI Control 3” or later.

^§2This button is available only when this unit is on.

^§3When this button is pressed, the playback image is not immediately displayed on the screen and it may not be possible to watch the contents

from where playback started.

In this case, press [:] or [6] to go back to where playback started.

^§4This function is available with the TV that supports “HDAVI Control 4”.

Note

≥These functions may not work normally depending on the equipment condition.

≥About “HDAVI Control” function, read the manual of the connected equipment (e.g., TV) too.

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Easy control only with VIERA remote control

If you connect this unit to the TV that supports “HDAVI Control 2” or later with an HDMI cable, you can enjoy using more convenient functions.

You can operate this unit using buttons on the TV remote control.

The buttons that you can use for this unit vary depending on the TV. For details, refer to the operating instructions of the TV.

Use the remote control supplied with this unit if you cannot operate this unit using buttons on the TV remote control.

≥The operation of this unit may be interrupted when you press incompatible buttons on the TV remote control.

≥The TV displays the TV tuner’s picture when the linked operation is finished.

Using the FUNCTION MENU Display to operate this unit^§1

FUNCTION MENU

Refer to the TV operating instructions for operating the TV.

HDD

Remain 30:00 SP

1 Display this unit’s “FUNCTION MENU Display” using the TV remote control.

Playback

Recording

Delete

Video

Picture

Music

≥If this unit is set to standby mode, it will automatically turn on.

2 Select the item you want to operate with the TV remote control, and press

[OK].

≥About the FUNCTION MENU Display (> 7, 35).

Copy

TV Guide

Others

Drive Select

RETURN

Pause live TV programme^§2

You can pause the TV programme you are watching and resume later by temporarily saving it on the HDD. This is useful when you have to

briefly stop watching TV to run an errand.

If you stop the Pause Live TV function, then the TV programme temporarily saved on the HDD will be deleted.

Refer to the TV operating instructions for operating the TV.

1 When you want to pause the TV programme

Turn on the “Pause Live TV” function using the TV remote control.

≥This unit turns on automatically.

2 When you want to resume

Display the Control Panel (> below) and press [OK].

≥The TV programme resumes.

To stop Pause Live TV

Press [4] while the Control Panel is displayed.

(> 35, To pause the TV programme you are watching—Pause Live TV)

Using the OPTION menu window to operate this unit^§1

By using the TV remote control, you can play discs using the “Control Panel” (> below) and display the Top Menu for DVD-Video.

Switch to TV

Displayed when watching with the tuner of

this unit. It will return to the TV picture.

1 Press [OPTION].

e,g.,

Control Panel

Control Panel is displayed (> below).

Control Panel

FUNCTION MENU

Top Menu

FUNCTION MENU

FUNCTION MENU Display is displayed

(> above).

Top Menu [DVD-V]

Menu [DVD-V]

Top menu is displayed (> 15).

Menu is displayed (> 15).

Drive Select

Note

Drive Select

Select the HDD or DVD drive

Rotate the still picture (> 33).

You cannot use the OPTION menu while the Top Menu for DVD-

Video is displayed and while DVD-Video is being copied.

Rotate RIGHT (JPEG)

Rotate LEFT (JPEG)

2 Select an item then press [OK].

Zoom in (JPEG)

Zoom out (JPEG)

Enlarge or shrink the still picture (> 33).

∫ Using the Control Panel

Using the Control Panel, you can operate search backward, search forward, stop, etc, with the TV remote control.

Select “Control Panel” and press [OK] in step 2 of “Using the OPTION menu window to operate this unit^§1” (> above).

The Control Panel is displayed (> right).

Control Panel

≥When playing a title or DVD-Video, etc.

Pause

–[3]: Pause, [4]: Stop, [2]: Search backward, [1]: Search forward, [OK]: Play, [EXIT]: Exit the Control Panel.

≥While playing still pictures

–[4]: Stop, [2]: View previous picture, [1]: View next picture, [EXIT]: Exit the Control Panel.

Exit

Play

Stop

^§1This function is available with the TV that supports “HDAVI Control 2” or later.

^§2This function is available with the TV that supports “HDAVI Control 3” or later.

∫ When you want to leave the TV on and set only this unit to standby mode

Press [Í] on this unit’s remote control and set to standby mode.

∫ When not using “HDAVI Control”

Set “VIERA Link” in the Setup menu to “Off” (> 63).

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Editing

Editing titles/chapters

[HDD] [RAM]

During play or while stopped

[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] (You cannot edit finalised discs.)

[+RW] [-RW‹VR›]

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

[HDD] [RAM] When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the “Red”

Chapter

button to select “VIDEO”.

Each section between the division points becomes a chapter.

2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title.

Title

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles

Title View screen

MUSIC

VIDEO

PICTURE

HDD

Chapter

008

10.10.

11.10.

[HDD] [RAM] You can change the order of chapters and create a

playlist (> 40).

Select Previous

Page 02/02

“Chapter Creation” in the Setup menu (> 61)

“Automatic”:

OPTION

RETURN

Detects changes (special mute points like the start and the end of

the programme) in the scene during recording and sets chapter

start points on them automatically.

≥Depending on the programme to be recorded or the Recording

Mode, the chapter start points may not be created correctly.

To show other pages

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press

[OK].

≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.

Multiple editing

Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)

A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.

“5 minutes”:

Sets chapter start points automatically during recording at

approximately 5-minute interval.

3 Press [OPTION].

≥The maximum number of items on a disc:

[HDD]

–Titles: 499

–Chapters: Approx. 1000 per title

(Depends on the state of recording.)

[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

–Titles: 99 ([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] 49 titles)

–Chapters: Approx. 1000 ([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Approx. 254)

(Depends on the state of recording.)

4 Press [3, 4] to select the operation

and press [OK].

≥If you select “Edit”, press [3, 4] to select the operation and

press [OK].

Enter Title Name

Set up Protection

Note

Cancel Protection

Refer to “Title

≥Once deleted, divided or partially deleted, recorded content cannot

be restored to its original state. Make certain before proceeding.

≥You cannot edit during recording or copying, etc.

≥Restricted recording information remains even after editing (e.g.

dividing a title etc).

Partial Delete

Change Thumbnail

Divide Title

Delete

Properties

Edit

operations”

(> 39).

Find Titles

To search programmes on TV Guide

(> 27)

To edit the group of titles [HDD] (> 29)

(> below)

≥[+R] [+R]DL] Each time you edit a title the information is saved to the

free space on the disc. If you do this numerous times, the amount

of free space decreases.

Create Group

Release Grouping

Chapter View

Table Display

All Titles

We recommend that you edit on the HDD and then copy to disc.

Switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR

appearance (> 29)

Editing titles/chapters and playing

chapters

You can modify (remove unnecessary parts, divide, etc.) recorded

programmes.

PICTURE/MUSIC

≥Playing still pictures (> 32)

≥To play music recorded on HDD (> 34)

Preparation

∫ If you select “Chapter View”

≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit

the connection to this unit.

≥Turn the unit on.

≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive containing the recorded

title to be edited.

5 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the

chapter.

To start play > Press [OK].

To edit > Step 6.

≥[RAM] Release protection (> 56, Setting the protection).

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Chapter View

HDD

Chapter View screen

VIDEO

008 ARD 11.10.

0:31.24

≥To show other pages/Multiple editing (> above)

6 Press [OPTION], then [3, 4] to select

the operation and press [OK].

Delete Chapter

Create Chapter

Refer to “Chapter

operations” (> 39).

Combine Chapters

Title View

≥You can go back to Title View.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Title operations

After performing steps 1–4 (> 38)

Delete^§

Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].

≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before proceeding.

≥The available recording space on DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL does not increase when you delete

titles.

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]

[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

≥Available recording space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +RW increases only when the last recorded

title is deleted. It does not increase if other titles are deleted (> 18).

Properties

Information (e.g., time and date) is shown.

≥Press [OK] to exit the screen.

Properties

Dinosaur

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]

[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]

No.

026

Time

12:19

Date 11.10.2009 MON Rec time 0:30 (SP)

Channel ARD

You can give names to recorded titles.

(> 44, Entering text)

≥[HDD] Even if the group name is changed, the title names in the group will not be changed.

Enter Title Name

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]

[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

Set up Protection^§

If set, this will protect the title from accidental deletion.

DIRECT NAVIGATOR All Tit

HDD

Cancel Protection^§

Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

The lock symbol appears when the title is protected.

007

008

[HDD] [RAM] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

ARD 10.10. FRI

ARD 11.10.

You can remove unnecessary part of the recording.

1Press [OK] at the start point and end point of the

section you want to delete.

Partial Delete

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Partial Delete

HDD

VIDEO

[HDD] [RAM]

008

PLAY

Start

End

(> below, For your reference)

Finish

2Press [3, 4] to select “Finish” and press [OK].

≥Select “Next” and press [OK] to delete other sections.

0:43.21

3Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].

Start

End

- -:- -.- -

You can change an image to be shown as the thumbnail picture in the Title

View.

1Press [1] (PLAY) to start play.

2Press [OK] when the image you want to use as a

Change Thumbnail

DIRECT NAVIGATOR ChangeThumbnail

HDD

VIDEO

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]

[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]



008

Change

Finish

(> below, For your reference)

thumbnail is shown.

To change the thumbnail

Restart play and press [3, 4] to select “Change”, then press [OK] at

the point you want to change.

0:00.00

Start play and select the image

Change

- -:- -.- -

of a thumbnail.

3Press [3, 4] to select “Finish” and press [OK].

You can divide a title into two.

Divide Title

DIRECT NAVIGATOR

HDD

Divide Title

VIDEO

1Press [OK] at the point you want to divide the title.

2Press [3, 4] to select “Finish” and press [OK].

[HDD] [RAM]

008

PLAY

Preview

Divide

(> below, For your reference)

3Press [2, 1] to select “Divide” and press [OK].

Finish

To confirm the division point

0:43.21

Press [3, 4] to select “Preview” and press [OK]. (The unit plays

10 seconds before and after the division point.)

To change the division point

Restart play and press [3, 4] to select “Divide”, then press [OK] at the point where you want to divide the

title.

Note

≥The divided titles retain the title name and CPRM property (> 81) of the original title.

≥Video and audio just before and after the dividing point may momentarily cut out.

≥[HDD] Divided titles form a group of titles.

Multiple editing is possible.

Chapter operations

After performing steps 1–6 (> 38)

Delete Chapter^§

Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].

≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before proceeding.

≥Select “Combine Chapters” (> below) when you only want to delete the division point between chapters.

(The recorded contents will not be deleted.)

[HDD] [RAM]

Select the point where you want to start a new chapter while viewing the

title.

Create Chapter

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Create Chapter

VIDEO

HDD

[HDD] [RAM]

008

PLAY

1Press [OK] at the point you want to divide.

(> below, For your reference)

Create

Finish

≥Repeat this step to divide at other points.

2Press [3, 4] to select “Finish” and press [OK].

0:43.21

Press [2, 1] to select “Combine” and press [OK].

≥The selected chapter and following chapter are combined.

Combine Chapters

[HDD] [RAM]

Multiple editing is possible.

For your reference

≥Use Search (> 28), Time Slip (> 28) to find the desired point.

≥To find the desired point correctly, use Slow-motion (> 28) and Frame-by-frame (> 28).

≥To skip to the start or end of a title, press [:] (start) or [9] (end).

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Creating, editing and playing playlists

You can arrange the chapters (> 38) to create a playlist.

4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Create”

Title

and press [OK].

Chapter

Playlists

HDD

- -

Playlist View

- -

Create

- -

Playlist

Chapter

5 Press [2, 1] to select the source title

and press [4].

≥Press [OK] to select all the chapters in the title, then skip to

step 7.

Copying (> 45) a playlist will create a title.

≥Playlists are not recorded separately so this doesn’t use much

capacity.

≥Editing chapters in a playlist does not modify the source titles and

source chapters.

≥You cannot create or edit playlists while recording or copying.

Create

Playlists

HDD

001 ARD 11.10. SAT

Source Title

001

Page 001/001

002

---

Source Chapter

001

003

---

[HDD] [RAM]

≥The maximum number of items on a disc:

Chapters in Playlist

---

–Playlists: 99

OPTION

Press RETURN to finish.

–Chapters in playlists: Approx. 1000

(Depends on the state of recording.)

≥If you exceed the maximum numbers of items for a disc, all the

items entered will not be recorded.

RETURN

6 Press [2, 1] to select the chapter you

want to add to a playlist and press

[OK].

Creating playlists

Press [3] to cancel.

[HDD] [RAM]

Preparation

Create

Playlists

HDD

001 ARD 11.10. SAT

Source Title

001

Page 001/001

≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit

the connection to this unit.

≥Turn the unit on.

002

---

Source Chapter

001

003

---

≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive containing the recorded

title to be edited.

Chapters in Playlist

---

≥[RAM] Release protection (> 56, Setting the protection).

≥You cannot create or edit a playlist while recording or while

copying.

≥Playlists must be made in accordance with the encoding system

currently selected in “TV System” (> 63).

OPTION

Press RETURN to finish.

RETURN

≥You can also create a new chapter from the source title.

Press [OPTION] to select “Create Chapter” and press [OK]

(> 39, Create Chapter).

7 Press [2, 1] to select the position to

While stopped

insert the chapter and press [OK].

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

Playlists

HDD

Create

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and

001 ARD 11.10. SAT

Source Title

001

Page 001/001

002

---

press [OK].

Source Chapter

001

003

---

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Playlists” and

Chapters in Playlist

---

press [OK].

FUNCTION MENU

Press RETURN to finish.

RETURN

HDD

Remain 30:00 SP

Playback

Recording

Delete

≥Press [3] to select other source titles.

≥Repeat steps 6–7 to add other chapters.

Playlists

Flexible Rec

DV Auto Rec

HDD Management

Setup

Copy

8 Press [RETURN ].

TV Guide

Others

All the selected scenes become the playlist.

Drive Select

RETURN

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Playlist operations

Editing and playing playlists/chapters

After performing steps 1–5 (> left)

[HDD] [RAM]

[-RW‹VR›] (Play only)

Delete^§

Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press

[OK].

Once deleted, the playlists are lost and

cannot be restored.

[HDD] [RAM]

While stopped

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

Make certain before proceeding.

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and

Playlist information (e.g., total time and date)

is shown.

Properties

press [OK].

[HDD] [RAM]

[-RW‹VR›]

Properties

≥Press [OK] to

exit the screen.

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Playlists” and

Dinosaur

No.

Date 12.10.2009 TUE

press [OK].

Chapters 002 Total 0:30.53

RETURN

4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the

playlist.

(> 40, Creating playlists, Step 5–8)

Create

To start play > Press [OK].

To edit > Step 5.

[HDD] [RAM]

Playlists

HDD

Playlist View

- -

Playlist View screen

Copy^§

Press [2, 1] to select “Copy” and press

[OK].

≥The copied playlist becomes the newest

one in the playlist view screen.

- -

[HDD] [RAM]

12.10. SUN 0:30

- -

Create

- -

≥To show other pages/Multiple editing (> 38)

5 Press [OPTION], then [3, 4] to select

the operation and press [OK].

You can give names to playlists.

(> 44, Entering text)

Enter

Name

[HDD] [RAM]

≥If you select “Edit”, press [3, 4] to select the operation and

(> 39, Change Thumbnail)

Change

press [OK].

Thumbnail

Create

[HDD] [RAM]

Copy

Refer to “Playlist

Enter Name

Multiple editing is possible.

Delete

operations”.

Change Thumbnail

Properties

Chapter operations

Edit

[HDD] [RAM]

Chapter View

After performing steps 1–7 (> left)

≥Editing chapters in a playlist does not modify the source titles and

source chapters.

∫ If you select “Chapter View”

(> 40, Creating playlists, Step 5–7)

Add

Chapter

6 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the

chapter.

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the position

to insert the chapter and press [OK].

Move

Chapter

To start play > Press [OK].

To edit > Step 7.

Playlists

HDD

Move Chapter

Playlists

HDD

Chapter View

Chapter View screen

01 12.10. SUN 0:11

002

01 ARD 12.10. SUN 0:30

001

---

001

002

---

0:10.24

0:19.36

0:10.24

0:19.36

---

≥To show ^-o^--ther pages/Multiple editing (> 38)

7 Press [OPTION], then [3, 4] to select

the operation and press [OK].

Page 01/01

(> 39, Create Chapter)

Create

Chapter

Add Chapter

Move Chapter

Refer to “Chapter

operations”.

(> 39, Combine Chapters)

Combine

Chapters

Create Chapter

Combine Chapters

Delete Chapter

(> 39, Delete Chapter)

The playlist itself is deleted if you delete all

the chapters in it.

Playlist View

Delete

Chapter^§

≥You can go back to Playlist View.

Multiple editing is possible.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Editing still pictures and music

Album (still picture) and picture operation

After performing steps 1–3 (> left)

Editing still pictures (JPEG)

[HDD] [-R] (JPEG) [RAM]

Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and

Delete

≥You can edit pictures and albums.

≥You cannot edit still pictures recorded on DVD-R DL, CD-R/CD-

RW and USB memory.

press [OK].

Picture^§

≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are

lost and cannot be restored. Make certain

Delete

≥You cannot edit still pictures recorded on finalised DVD-R.

before proceeding.

≥When deleting an album, files other than the

still picture files inside the album will also be

deleted. (This does not apply to folders under

the album concerned.)

≥[-R] Available space does not increase even

after pictures are deleted.

Album^§

Preparation

[HDD]

≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD.

≥[RAM] Release protection (> 56, Setting the protection).

[-R] (JPEG)

[RAM]

1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

[HDD] [RAM] When “PICTURE” is not selected, press the

You can change the date of the picture.

1 Press [2, 1] to select the item and press

[3, 4] to change.

2 Press [OK].

Change

“Green” button to select “PICTURE”.

Date^§

Editing an album:

[HDD] [RAM]

Select the album to be edited and

press [OPTION].

You can give names to albums.

(> 44, Entering text)

≥Album names input using this unit may not be

displayed on other equipment.

Enter

Album

≥When you want to create an album using “Create Album”,

Name

press [OPTION] without selecting album.

[HDD] [RAM]

Editing a still picture:

1Select the album which contains the still

picture to edit and press [OK].

2Select the still pictures to edit and press

[OPTION].

Set up

If set, this will protect the

still picture or album from

accidental deletion.

Press [2, 1] to

select “Yes” and

press [OK].

The lock symbol appears

when the still picture or album is protected.

≥Even if the protection setting is used by this

unit to protect an album, the album may be

deleted by another unit.

DIRECT NAVIGATOR

HDD

Protection^§

103_

Album Name

0001

0002

Cancel

Protection^§

To show other pages

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press

[OK].

≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.

Multiple editing

Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)

A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.

0005

0006

[HDD] [RAM]

Information (e.g., image size and file size) is

shown.

≥To exit the Properties screen, press [OK].

Properties

[HDD] [RAM] [-R]

[-R]DL] [CD]

[USB]

3 Press [3, 4] to select the operation

and press [OK].

∫ To edit the album

1 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” or “Yes”

and press [OK].

2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album

that contains the still picture you want to

add and press [OK].

Add

(e.g., [HDD])

Pictures

Useful functions during still picture

play (> 33)

Create

Start Slideshow

Album

Slideshow Setting

3 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press

[OK].

[HDD] [RAM]

Add Pictures

Create Album

Edit Album

Delete Album

Change Date

≥If “Select pictures to copy” is selected:

Select the still picture you want to add and

press [OK].

Set up Protection

Cancel Protection

≥

If “Copy all pictures” is selected:

All the still pictures in the album will be copied.

Copy to DVD

4 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” or “No” and

press [OK].

VIDEO/MUSIC

≥If you want to continue copying, select

“Yes” and go to step 2.

Album (still picture) and picture operation

(> right)

Only for “Create Album”

5 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” or “No” and

press [OK].

∫ To edit still picture

(e.g., [HDD])

≥If “Yes” is selected:

You can give names to albums. (> 44,

Entering text)

≥If “No” is selected:

The album name is automatically given.

Delete Picture

Properties

Album (still picture) and picture

operation (> right)

Change Date

Set up Protection

Cancel Protection

For copy to DVD-RAM or HDD

Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and

press [OK].

Copy to

DVD^§

You can go back to Album View.

Album View

[HDD]

For copy to DVD-R

Press [2, 1] to select “Copy &

Finalise” or “Copy Only” and press

[OK].

Copy to

HDD^§

[RAM]

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

≥

Use blank discs or unfinalised discs on which

JPEG images are recorded with this unit.

Multiple editing is possible.

[Change Date : Only when the “Picture (JPEG) View” screen is

displayed]

Note

≥Timer recordings do not start when performing “Change Date”,

“Copy to DVD”, “Copy to HDD”, “Add Pictures” or “Create Album”.

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Editing music

[HDD]

Deleting still pictures and music using

DELETE Navigator

[HDD] [-R] (JPEG) [RAM]

Preparation

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.

While stopped

1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

When “MUSIC” is not selected, press the “Yellow” button to

select “MUSIC”.

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete” and

Editing an album:

press [OK].

Press [3, 4] to select the album and

press [OPTION].

[HDD] [RAM]

Editing a track

Press [3, 4] to select “Picture” or

“Music”.

1Press [3, 4] to select the album and press

[OK].

4 Press [OK].

2Press [3, 4] to select the track and press

[OPTION].

Deleting an album

3 Press [3, 4] to select the operation

and press [OK].

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the item

and press [DELETE ¢].

Deleting a still picture or track

∫ To edit the album (Music)

1Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album

which contains the still picture or track to

delete and press [OK].

2Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still

picture or track and press [OK].

Delete Album

Album and track operation (> below)

Enter Album Name

Repeat Play Setting

Useful functions during music play (> 34)

Track View

Sort

You can confirm the item that you have selected using the

option menu.

≥Refer to option menu operations for the “Album View” (> 42,

step 3).

≥Selecting recorded programmes (titles) to

play—DIRECT NAVIGATOR (> 29)

≥Playing still pictures (> 32)

VIDEO/PICTURE

≥Refer to option menu operations for the “Picture (JPEG)

View” (> 42, step 3).

≥Refer to option menu operations for the “Album View

(Music)” (> left, step 3).

≥Refer to option menu operations for the “Track View (Music)”

(> left, step 3).

> below

∫ To edit the track (Music)

Delete Track

Album and track operation (> below)

Properties

To show other pages [Album (still picture) and still

picture only]

Enter Track Name

Enter Artist Name

Repeat Play Setting

Album View

Press [:, 9] to show other pages.

Multiple deleting [Album (still picture) and still picture

only]

Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)

A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.

You can go back to Album View

Useful functions during music play (> 34)

6 Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

press [OK].

The item is deleted.

To exit the screen

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

Album and track operation

After performing steps 1-3 (> above)

Delete Album

Delete Track

Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and

press [OK].

≥Once deleted, the recorded contents

are lost and cannot be restored. Make

certain before proceeding.

Enter Album Name

Enter Track Name

You can give names to albums and tracks.

(> 44, Entering text)

Enter Artist Name

You can edit the artist name of the track.

(> 44, Entering text)

Note

≥When the timer recording starts, editing music stops on the way.

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Entering text

2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

character and press [OK].

You can give names to recorded titles, etc.

Repeat this step to enter other characters.

The maximum number of characters:

≥To delete a character

[HDD] [RAM]

Characters

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the character in the name field

and press [;]. (The selected characters are deleted.)

64 (44^§)

Title

Playlist

≥Using the numbered buttons to enter characters

Album of still pictures

Album (CD) ([HDD])

e.g., entering the letter “R”

1 Press [7] to move to the 7th row.

2 Press [7] twice to highlight “R”.

3 Press [OK].

Track (CD/MP3/WMA) ([HDD])

Artist (CD/MP3/WMA) ([HDD])

Disc ([RAM])

6 M

≥To enter a space

Press [DELETE ¢] and press

[OK].

^§Title name for timer recording

[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

Characters

Title

Disc

3 Press [∫] (Set).

Broadcast

Characters

To end partway

Press [RETURN ].

Favourite 1–4

Text is not added.

Note

∫ To add a name

If a name is long, parts of it may not be shown in some screens.

You can add frequently used names and recall them later.

Maximum number of added names: 20

Maximum number of characters per name: 44

After entering the name (steps 1-2).

1 Show Enter Name screen etc.

Title (timer recording)

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Add to List” and press [OK].

≥You can also press [9] to select “Add to List”.

Press [2, 1] to select “Add” and press [OK].

Select “Programme Name”. (> 23, Manually programming

timer recordings, step 3)

≥Press [RETURN ] to cancel.

Free Word Search

Press [OPTION]. (> 27, “Searching by entering words”)

Find Titles

Select “Find Titles”. (> 27, “Searching using programme

information of titles recorded to the HDD”, step 4)

∫ To recall an added name

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Name List” and press [OK].

≥You can also press [:] to select “Name List”.

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the name to be recalled and

press [OK].

Title

Select “Enter Title Name”. (> 38, step 4)

∫ To delete an added name

Playlist

Select “Enter Name”. (> 41, step 5)

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Name List” and press [OK].

≥You can also press [:] to select “Name List”.

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the name to be deleted.

Press [OPTION] to show “Delete Name” and press [OK].

Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].

Press [RETURN ].

Album of still pictures

Select “Enter Album Name”. (> 42, Editing still pictures

(JPEG), step 3)

Album (CD/MP3/WMA) ([HDD])

Select “Enter Album Name”. (> 43, Editing music, step 3)

Track (CD/MP3/WMA) ([HDD])

Select “Enter Track Name”. (> 43, Editing music, step 3)

For your reference

If you enter a long name, only part of it is shown in the Top Menu

after finalisation (> 58). When entering a title name, the name that

will appear in the Top Menu can be previewed in “Top Menu

Preview” window.

Artist (CD/MP3/WMA) ([HDD])

Select “Enter Artist Name”. (> 43, Editing music, step 3)

Disc

Select “Disc Name”. (> 56, Providing a name for a disc,

Enter Name

Chapter 1_

step 1)

Favourite 1–4

Press the “Red” button. (> 59, To change the name of a

Favourite in the “Favourite” column, step 2)

ꢃ

ꢄ

ꢅ

Top Menu Preview

Chapter 1

Name field: shows the text you have entered

Enter Name

Top Menu Preview

 





 







Delete

[

]

(

}

Add to List

Name List

{

)

;



SELECT



Space

RETURN

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ying

Copying titles or playlists

Copy [Video (HDD to DVD)]

Advanced Copy

Features

Easy copying from HDD to DVD with no difficult

settings.

Make a copy list and then copy.

You can set the unit to copy titles or playlists in the

way you want.

Copy direction

HDD > DVD

≤

DVD > HDD

–

≤

[RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [+RW]

[DVD-V] (Only from a finalised disc)

High speed mode copy^§1

≤

[DVD-V] You cannot perform high-speed copy with finalised discs.

[+RW] You cannot perform high-speed copy from +RW to HDD.

§2

Changing recording mode

Finalise^§3

–

≤

[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]

Automatically finalised

Can be selected

High speed mode

Normal speed mode

High speed mode

Normal speed mode

Copying playlists^§4

–

≤

–

≤

§5

Are chapters maintained?

Are thumbnails maintained?

Recording and Playing while Copying

≤

–

§6

§7

§6

–

≤

–

§8

–

≤

^§1To high speed copy titles (or playlists created from those titles), set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On” before recording to the HDD (The

default setting is “On”. > 61).

However in the following cases, copying to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW using the high speed mode does not work.

≥

When arranging multiple titles for copying, if any titles are recorded with “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “Off”, then you cannot perform with high-speed copy.

≥Playlists created from titles using a variety of recording modes or multiple titles using FR recording mode.

≥Playlists mixed with a variety of audio types (Dolby Digital and LPCM, etc.).

≥Titles that contain many deleted segments.

≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded in “EP” mode and “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode. (Displayed

≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect

)

≥[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect using “EP” mode or “FR” (recordings 5 hours or longer) mode

^§2If you select a recording mode with better picture quality than the original, the picture quality does not improve. (However it does prevent

against degradation of picture quality.)

[+R]DL] You cannot copy in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.

^§3You cannot select “Top Menu” or “Auto-Play Select”.

If you want to set auto-play select or the background colour, select “Top Menu” or “Auto-Play Select” in “DVD Management” before copying (

^§4You cannot copy playlists with a play time more than 8 hours.

58).

When you copy a playlist, it will become a title in the destination drive.

^§5[RAM] [-R]DL] [+R]DL] [+RW] : One title becomes one chapter.

[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] : Chapters are created automatically ([-R] [-RW‹V›] about 5 minutes [+R] about 8 minutes) when finalising after copying the disc.

^§6Thumbnails return to the default position.

^§7When copying playlists, the thumbnails may not reflect changes made to them.

^§8Possible only with titles on the HDD

(However it is not possible when copying with automatic finalisation.)

– You cannot perform chasing play or edit, etc. while copying.

– You cannot play a playlist while copying titles with “One time only recording” restriction (> 19).

– Still pictures or music cannot be played.

∫ Approximate copying times (Max. speed)

(excludes time required to write data management information)

HDD

5X Speed

DVD-RAM

12X Speed

4X Speed

8X Speed

+R^§4

4X Speed

+R DL^§2

4X Speed

+RW

DVD-R^§1

DVD-R DL^§2

DVD-RW^§3

Recording

Mode

Recorded

Required Speed Required Speed Required Speed Required Speed Required Speed Required Speed Required Speed

time

5 min. 46 s.

2 min. 30 s.

1 min. 21 s.

58 s.

time

hour

12 min.

6 min.

3 min.

2 min.

1 min. 30 s.

10x

24x

44x

62x

75x

15 min.

7 min. 30 s.

3 min. 45 s.

2 min. 30 s.

1 min. 53 s.

15 min.

7 min. 30 s.

3 min. 45 s.

2 min. 30 s.

1 min. 57 s.

8 min. 20 s.

3 min. 45 s.

1 min. 53 s.

15 min.

7 min. 30 s.

3 min. 45 s.

15 min.

7 min. 30 s.

3 min. 45 s.

10x

20x

30x

40x

16x

32x

16x

24x

32x

16x

24x

31x

16x

EP (6H)

EP (8H)

48 s.

≥The above rated value indicates the fastest time and speed required for copying 1 hour title from HDD to each disc in the above list supporting

High-Speed copying. The amount of time and speed may vary depending on the conditions such as the area on where information is written or

unique feature on the disc.

^§1In this unit, copying with a 16X Speed DVD-R disc will be performed at the same speed as with a 12X Speed DVD-R disc.

^§2In this unit, copying with 8X Speed discs, DVD-R DL and +R DL, will be performed at the same speed as with 4X Speed discs, DVD-R DL and +R DL.

^§3In this unit, copying with a 6X Speed DVD-RW disc will be performed at the same speed as with a 4X Speed DVD-RW disc.

^§4In this unit, copying with a 16X Speed +R disc will be performed at the same speed as with a 8X Speed +R disc.

Note

≥When recording or playing while copying, the unit may not use the maximum recording speed.

≥Depending on the condition of the disc, the unit may not copy using the maximum speed.

Regarding copying to DVD-R DL (single-sided, Dual Layer) and +R DL

(single-sided, Double Layer)

Regarding copying of the broadcasts that allow “One

time only recording”

You can copy a recorded title to a CPRM (> 81) compatible

DVD-RAM, however, the title is deleted from the HDD.

≥Titles or playlists cannot be copied from DVD-RAM to the

HDD.

≥Titles will not be copied if they are protected (> 39).

≥You cannot copy playlists created from “One time only

recording” titles.

≥Titles with recording limitations and playlists cannot be

registered on the same copying list.

When not copying in high speed mode, titles are temporarily copied at normal

speed to the HDD and then copied at high speed to DVD-R DL and +R DL.

The titles that were temporarily copied to the HDD are then deleted.

You cannot copy to DVD-R DL and +R DL in the following cases.

– When there is not enough free space on the HDD. (When copying to a new

blank disc, if you intend to fill a new disc when copying to it, the equivalent

of up to 4 hours of free space in SP mode is needed on the HDD.)

– When the number of titles recorded to the HDD and the number of titles to

be copied to the DVD-R DL and +R DL is greater than 499 in total.

When playing a title recorded on both layers, video and audio may

momentarily cut out when the unit is switching layers. (> 10)

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Copying titles or playlists

Before copying

4 Press [3, 4] to select the title you

When copying a title with main and secondary audio

≥Select the audio type for recording bilingual broadcast from

“Bilingual Audio Selection” (> 62) when:

–Copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),

+R, +R DL and +RW.

want to copy and press [;].

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all

necessary items.

≥Press [;] again to cancel.

–When “Audio Mode for XP Recording” is set to “LPCM” (> 62)

and you are copying in XP mode.

To show other pages

Press [:, 9] to show other pages.

∫ Speed and recording mode when copying

5 Press [OK].

[HDD] ,-. [RAM] : High speed

[HDD] > [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] : Refer to the following

After you start copying DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-

table.

Video format), +R and +R DL discs, they become play-

only and you can no longer record or edit.

Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and

press [OK].

Copy starts.

Rec for High Speed Copy (> 61)

Copy speed

Only titles recorded with “Rec for High

Speed Copy” set to “On”. ^§

High speed

Only titles recorded with “Rec for High

Speed Copy” set to “Off”.

Normal speed

When making a copy of multiple titles that

were recorded with “Rec for High Speed

Copy” set to “On” and “Off”.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

In the following cases, even if “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to

“On”, copy will perform at normal speed.

∫ To stop copying (> 47)

≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] When the copying source was recorded in “EP”

or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.

≥When the copy destination (disc) does not have enough space.

≥When the title aspect for the copying source and “Aspect for

Recording” (> 61) do not match.

≥When the title aspect for the copying source is 16:9:

–[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

–[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] copying source was recorded in “EP” or “FR

(recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.

∫ COPY Navigator/Copying list icons and

functions (> 48)

∫ To check the properties of a title and sort COPY

Navigator

1 Press [3, 4] to select the title and press

[OPTION].

COPY Navigator

HDD

All Titles

Disc Space: 4310MB

Total Size: 0MB( 0%)

No. Channel Date Day Time Title Name

Total

Note

001

002

003

004

ARD 26. 9. FRI 13:30

ZDF 27. 9. SAT 12:15

AV2 3. 10. FRI 20:00

ARD 3. 10. FRI 22:05

≥Titles and playlists recorded using a different encoding system

(PAL or NTSC) from the TV system currently selected on the unit

cannot be copied.

Rec time

005 AV2 4. 10. SAT 16:10

006 ZDF 10.10. FRI 9:25

007 ARD 10.10. FRI 13:30

008 ARD 11.10. SAT 21:00

---

0:52(SP)

Properties

≥[-R] Video (Titles or playlists) cannot be copied to a disc with still

pictures (JPEG) already recorded on it.

≥[-R] Still images cannot be copied to a DVD-R disc with video

already recorded on it.

Page 01/01

Sort

Grouped Titles

OPTION

RETURN

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Properties” or “Sort”

and press [OK].

Preparation

≥Insert a disc that you can use for copying (> 10).

≥Confirm that there is enough remaining disc space.

Properties:

The name, recording date, channel etc. of the selected title are

shown.

Copy [Video (HDD to DVD)]

Sort (All Titles screen only):

Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].

This changes the way that titles are displayed. You can select to

display titles by No., channel, recording date, day, recording start

time and title name. (You cannot select this item if a title has a check

mark.)

DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and +R DL

are automatically finalised (> 81). After finalising, the discs

become play-only and you can also play them on other DVD

equipment. However, you can no longer record or edit.

If you close the COPY Navigator screen, the display order is

cancelled.

[HDD] > [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

(You cannot copy to finalised discs.)

When copying in normal speed, recording mode will be set to FR.

(However, if there is still not enough space after setting to FR mode,

copy will not be performed.)

Note

≥When copying titles in high speed mode to high speed recording

compatible DVD-RAM 5X, DVD-R 8X, +R 8X or +RW 4X, the

sound of the disc rotating becomes louder than normal.

If you want copy to perform more quietly, select “Normal ( Silent )”

in “DVD Speed for High Speed Copy” in the Setup menu (> 61).

≥If you register multiple titles, they are copied in order from the title

at the top of the screen and not in the order you registered them.

To change the order that titles are copied, create a copying list and

then copy the contents of the list (> 47).

While stopped

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy” and

press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Video (HDD to

DVD)” and press [OK].

COPY Navigator

HDD

All Titles

Disc Space: 4310MB

Total Size: 0MB( 0%)

No. Channel Date Day Time Title Name

Total

001

002

003

004

ARD 26. 9. FRI 13:30

ZDF 27. 9. SAT 12:15

AV2 3. 10. FRI 20:00

ARD 3. 10. FRI 22:05

Rec time

0:52(SP)

005 AV2 4. 10. SAT 16:10

006 ZDF 10.10. FRI 9:25

007 ARD 10.10. FRI 13:30

008 ARD 11.10. SAT 21:00

---

Page 01/01

Select

OPTION

RETURN

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

≥When copying to a disc using high speed mode,

Copying using the copying list–

Advanced Copy

[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] : only items indicated with “

” or

“

” can be registered.

[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] : only items indicated with “

registered.

≥To show other pages (> below)

” can be

[HDD] ,-. [RAM] [+RW]

[-RW‹VR›] > [HDD]

[HDD] > [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]

You can order titles and playlists as desired for copy to disc.

5 Press [OK].

≥To edit the copying list (> 48)

See also “Before copying” (> 46).

You cannot start copying when the value of the “Size” (> 48)

exceeds 100% (“Destination Capacity:” is not sufficient).

While stopped

6 Press [2] to confirm.

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

7 Press [3, 4] to select “Start

Copying” and press [OK].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy” and

When copying titles in high speed mode to high speed

recording compatible DVD-RAM 5X, DVD-R 8X, +R 8X or

+RW 4X, the sound of the disc rotating becomes louder than

normal.

press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Advanced

Copy” and press [OK].

If you want copy to perform more quietly, select “Normal

( Silent )” in “DVD Speed for High Speed Copy” in the Setup

menu (> 61).

Copy

Cancel All

Source

HDD

DVD

1 ^{Copy Direction}

8 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and

HDD DVD

Destination

Copy Mode

VIDEO High Speed

press [OK] to start copying.

[HDD] > [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]

Press [2, 1] to select “Copy &

Finalise” or “Copy Only” and press

[OK].

Create List

Select the copy direction.

Start Copying

RETURN

≥If you are not going to change the registered list, press [4]

several times (> step 7).

≥If “Copy & Finalise” is selected

4 Set the copy direction.

After finalising, the discs become play-only and you can also

play them on other DVD equipment. However, you can no

longer record or edit.

≥If you are not going to change the copying direction, press

[4] (> step 5).

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Direction” and press [1].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Source” and press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [OK].

If you select “HDD”, “Destination” is automatically set to

“DVD”, or vice versa.

To show other pages

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press [OK].

≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.

∫ To stop copying

Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.

(You cannot stop while finalising)

4 Press [2] to confirm.

5 Set the recording mode.

≥If you are not going to change the recording mode, press

[4] (> step 6).

When High-speed copying

All titles that have completely copied at the point cancelled are

copied.

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Mode” and press [1].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Recording Mode” and press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select the mode and press [OK].

4 Press [2] to confirm.

When Normal Speed copying

Copies until the point cancelled. However as for titles with “One

time only recording” restriction, only titles that have completely

copied at the point cancelled are copied to the disc. Titles that are

cancelled before the copy is complete are not copied and remain

on the HDD.

≥[-R]DL] [+R]DL] If copy is cancelled during the step while

temporarily copying to the HDD, then nothing will be copied.

However, if copy is cancelled during the step while copying to

disc from the HDD, then only titles completely copied at the point

canceled are copied.

6 Register titles and playlists for copy.

≥If you are going to copy a registered list without making any

changes to it (> step 7).

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].

Copy

Cancel All

Destination Capacity: 4343MB

( 0%)

0MB

Size:

Name of item

New item (Total=0)

1 ^{Copy Direction}

No. Size

HDD DVD

Copy Mode

Even if the title was not copied to the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW

(DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW, the amount of remaining

writable disc space becomes less.

VIDEO High Speed

Create List

Page 01/01

Create copy list.

Start Copying

∫ To return to the previous screen

OPTION

RETURN

Press [RETURN ].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK].

3 Press the “Red” button to select “VIDEO” or press the

“Green” button to select “Playlists”.

∫ Recording and playing while copying

You can record and play using the HDD while high speed copying.

(Only when high speed copying without finalising)

≥Still pictures and music recorded on the HDD cannot be played.

Press [OK] to cancel the screen display.

Create List

HDD

All Titles

VIDEO Playlists

- - -

007

008

0:30(XP)

≥To confirm the current progress

Press [STATUS ].

ARD 10.10. FRI

- - -

ARD 11.10. SAT

- - -

Note

≥Timer recordings executed while copying are recorded to the

HDD regardless of the recording drive settings.

(Only when high speed copying without finalising)

Page 02/02

Select

OPTION

RETURN

4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title or playlist and press

[;].

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select

all necessary items.

≥Press [;] again to cancel.

≥The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If

you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at

a time.

≥When you switch between the “VIDEO” and “Playlists” tab,

the check mark is cancelled.

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Copying titles or playlists

COPY Navigator/Copying list icons and functions

Copying a finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL,

DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and

+R DL

[DVD-V] > [HDD]

COPY Navigator/Copying list indicators

Titles and playlists that can be copied in high speed

mode to DVD-R, DVD-R DL,

DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL, +RW

Titles and playlists that can be copied in high speed

mode to DVD-R, DVD-R DL,

DVD-RW (DVD-Video format)

(However, titles and playlists cannot be copied in

high speed mode to +R, +R DL, +RW)

You can copy the content of finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW

(DVD-Video format), +R, and +R DL to the HDD and re-edit.

While playing a disc, the content being played is copied to the HDD

according to the set time.

≥If you perform search, frame-by-frame or pause while copying, that

portion of title is not recorded.

≥When “Rec for High Speed Copy” (> 61) is set to “On” and you

make a copy, the copy will be made using the picture size selected

in “Aspect for Recording” (> 61) of the Setup menu.

[+R]DL]

is displayed, but copy cannot be

performed.

Title with “One time only recording” restriction

(> 19, When recording the “One time only

recording” broadcasts)

≥Operations and on screen displays during copy are also

recorded.

≥Almost all DVD-Video on sale have been treated to prevent

illegal copying, and cannot be copied.

Titles deleted from the HDD by “One time only

recording” restriction after copying. (> 19, When

recording the “One time only recording” broadcasts)

≥The following cannot be copied: Video CD, Audio CD and so on.

Title or playlist contains still picture(s)

≥Still picture(s) cannot be copied.

Preparation

≥Insert the finalised disc (> 13).

Title or playlist recorded using a different encoding

system from that of the TV system currently

selected on the unit.

≥Titles and playlists displaying these marks cannot

be selected.

(NTSC)

(PAL)

After performing steps 1–5 (“Format” is automatically set to “DVD-

Video”) (> 47, Copying using the copying list–Advanced Copy)

1 Set “Copy Time”.

Data size of each registered item

≥If you are not going to change the setting (> step 2).

Size:

Destination Capacity: 4343MB

Data size recorded to the copy destination

≥When copying at normal speed, the total

data size will change according to the

recording mode.

Size:

0MB (0%)

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Time” and press [1].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Time Setting” and press [OK].

No. Size

Name of item

New item (Total=0)

≥Setting the unit to copy all the content on the disc

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Off” and press [OK].

4 Press [2] to confirm.

≥The total data size shown may be larger

than the sum of the data sizes for each

registered item, because of data

management information being written to

the copy destination, etc.

Page 01/01

Create copy list.

Copy will continue until there is not enough available

recording space on the HDD.

≥Setting the unit to copy according to the set time

3 Press [3, 4] to select “On” and press [OK].

4 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Time” and press [OK].

To play DVD-R, DVD-R DL,DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and

+R DL on other players, it is necessary to finalise them after copy.

Copy

∫ To edit the copying list

Select the item in step 6–5(> 47)

1 Press [OPTION].

Cancel All

1 ^{Copy Direction}

DVD ꢀꢁHDD

Delete All

Hour

00 Min.

Copy Mode

DVD-Video XP

Set the time a few minutes

longer.

2 Press [3, 4] to select the operation and press

Add

Copy Time

[OK].

Delete

Move

Press OK to change the setting.

Start Copying

Delete All:

RETURN

Delete all items registered on the copying list.

Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

5 Press [2, 1] to select “Hour” and “Min.” and press

[3, 4] to set the recording time.

Add:

6 Press [OK].

Add new items to the copying list.

7 Press [2] to confirm.

Copying to the HDD continues for the set time even after the

content being played finishes.

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title or playlist and press [;].

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all

necessary items.

≥Set a few minutes longer than the source title, in order to

include the operation time before play begins.

≥You can also set the recording time with the numbered

buttons.

≥Press [;] again to cancel.

Press [OK].

Delete:

Delete the selected items.

Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Start

Move:

Copying” and press [OK].

Move selected items or change the order of items on the copying list.

Press [3, 4] to select the destination and press [OK].

Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK] to start copying.

The disc top menu is displayed.

≥Disc play automatically begins from title 1 when “Title 1” is

selected from the “Auto-Play Select” menu when finalising

the disc (> 58).

To cancel all registered copying setting and lists

After performing steps 1–3 (> 47)

Press [3, 4] to select “Cancel All” and press [OK].

Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

≥The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following situations.

–When a title, still picture, etc. has been recorded or deleted at the

copy source

–When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit,

open the tray, change the copy direction, etc.

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

When the top menu is displayed

Copying SD Video from a video

equipment

Motion pictures encoded in the MPEG2 format, which have been

taken by a Panasonic digital video camera with HDD etc, can be

copied from the camera’s HDD to this unit’s HDD or DVD-RAM.

(All the recordings on the same date become a title.)

≥You cannot playback SD Video in the camera’s HDD with this unit.

You must copy the files to the HDD or a DVD-RAM.

≥You cannot playback or record while copying SD Video.

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title

you want to start copying, and press

[OK].

My favorite

01/02

Chapter

While playing in order, all the titles after the selected title are

recorded until the set time. (After the last title on the disc has

finished playing the top menu is recorded until the set time is

reached.)

VIDEO^§

SD Video

REC

To return to the previous screen

HDD

Press [RETURN ].

DVD-RAM

To stop copying

Press [∫].

You can also press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds to stop

copying.

≥If stopped partway, copying will be up to that point.

USB Cable

Note

^§DVD Video Recording format

≥The screen on the right is recorded at the

beginning.

≥The content is recorded as 1 title from the start of

copy to the end.

≥If play does not begin automatically or if the top

menu does not display automatically, press

[1] (PLAY) to start.

≥Even if you copy a high quality video/audio DVD, the original

picture and audio quality cannot be exactly replicated.

≥If you want to copy a title from a finalised DVD-RW (DVD Video

Recording format), create a copy list and then copy (> 47,

Copying using the copying list–Advanced Copy).

Preparation

Turn on both this unit and the camera.

Connect the camera to this unit with USB cable.

Select the appropriate mode that makes the camera ready for

data transfer (such as “PC CONNECT”) on the camera.

≥Refer to the camera’s operating instructions for detail.

The display below automatically appears when you connect the

camera to this unit.

Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Video ( MPEG2 )” and press [OK].

Then go to step 7 on page 47.

USB device

Play Video (DivX)

Copy Video (MPEG2)

Play Pictures (JPEG)

Copy All Pictures (JPEG)

Copy Pictures (JPEG)

Play Music (MP3&WMA)

Copy Music (MP3&WMA)

Update CD database on HDD

SELECT

RETURN

≥SD Video on the camera are automatically registered on the copy

list.

≥If there are no SD Video on the camera, “Copy Video ( MPEG2 )”

is not displayed.

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Copying still pictures

≥You cannot copy pictures recorded to DVD-R, DVD-R DL or CD-R/

CD-RW.

∫ To register on a folder by folder basis

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Picture/Folder” and press [OK].

Copying using the copying list

Copy

Destination Capacity: 4343MB

Cancel All

[HDD] ,-. [RAM]

Picture

Picture/Folder

Copy Direction

No. Size

Name of item

New item (Total=0)

[HDD] > [-R]

DVD HDD

Copy Mode

3 P²ress [3, 4] to select “Folder” and press [OK].

4 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK].

5 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [;].

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select

all necessary items.

While stopped

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy” and

≥Press [;] again to cancel.

≥The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If

you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at

a time.

press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Advanced

≥To show other pages (> below)

Copy” and press [OK].

6 Press [OK].

Copy

Cancel All

≥To edit the copying list (> 51)

7 Press [2] to confirm.

Source

DVD

1 ^{Copy Direction}

DVD HDD

Destination

HDD

Copy Mode

PICTURE High Speed

7 Press [3, 4] to select “Start

Create List

Copying” and press [OK].

≥If you are not going to change the registered list, press [4]

several times (> step 7).

≥Only when copying individual still pictures.

When specifying another folder as the copying destination,

select “Folder”.

4 Set the copy direction.

≥If you are not going to change the copying direction, press

[4] (> step 5).

Folder

New folder

001 100__DVD

002 101__DVD

003 102__DVD

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Direction” and press [1].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Source” and press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [OK].

4 Press [3, 4] to select “Destination” and press [OK].

5 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [OK].

The same drive as the copy source can be selected.

6 Press [2] to confirm.

---

New folder

---

8 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and

press [OK] to start copying.

For copy to DVD-R

5 Set the copy mode.

Press [2, 1] to select “Copy &

Finalise” or “Copy Only” and press

[OK].

≥If you are not going to change the recording mode, press

[4] (> step 6).

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Mode” and press [1].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Format” and press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select “PICTURE” and press [OK].

“Recording Mode” is automatically set to “High Speed”.

4 Press [2] to confirm.

To stop copying

Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

6 Register still pictures for copy.

≥If you are going to copy a registered list without making any

changes to it (> step 7).

Note

You can register still pictures or still picture folders.

≥The sequence in which the still pictures are registered on the copy

list may not be the same at the copy destination.

≥If still pictures are already contained inside the copy destination

folder, the new still pictures are recorded following the existing still

pictures.

≥If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number of files/

folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (> 12), copying will

stop partway through.

≥

Still pictures and folders cannot be registered on the same list.

Copy

Destination Capacity: 4343MB

Cancel All

Picture

Picture/Folder

1 ^{Copy Direction}

No. Size

Name of item

New item (Total=0)

DVD HDD

Copy Mode

PICTURE High Speed

Create List

≥You cannot copy the information about the picture rotation.

≥[-R] Video (Titles or playlists) cannot be copied to a disc with still

pictures (JPEG) already recorded on it.

Page 01/01

Create copy list.

Start Copying

≥[-R] Still images cannot be copied to a DVD-R disc with video

already recorded on it.

∫ To register individual still pictures

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK].

To show other pages

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press [OK].

≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.

Press [

1] to select the still picture and press [;].

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select

all necessary items.

≥Press [;] again to cancel.

≥The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If

you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at

a time.

≥To show other pages (> right)

≥To select another folder (> 51)

4 Press [OK].

≥To edit the copying list (> 51)

5 Press [2] to confirm.

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

∫ To edit the copying list

Select the item in step 6–4(for a still picture) or 6–6

(for a folder) (> 50)

1 Press [OPTION].

Copying still pictures on the USB

memory

Delete All

Add

2 Press [3, 4] to select the operation and press

[OK].

Delete

Copying all the still pictures

[USB] > [HDD]

Delete All:

Delete all items registered on the copying list.

Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

While stopped

Add:

Insert the USB memory (> 13).

Add new items to the copying list.

The menu is automatically displayed.

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still picture or folder and press

[;].

USB device

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all

necessary items.

≥Press [;] again to cancel.

Press [OK].

Play Video ( DivX )

Play Pictures ( JPEG )

Copy All Pictures ( JPEG )

Copy Pictures ( JPEG )

Play Music ( MP3&WMA )

Copy Music ( MP3&WMA )

Update CD database on HDD

Delete:

Delete the selected items.

Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy All

Pictures ( JPEG )” and press [OK].

Copy All Pictures

To cancel all registered copying settings and lists

After performing steps 1–3 (> 50, Copying using the copying list)

Press [3, 4] to select “Cancel All” and press [OK].

Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

≥The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following situations.

– When a title or still picture has been recorded or deleted at the

copy source

Copy from

USB

Copy to

HDD

– When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit,

open the tray, change the copy direction, etc.

3 Press [2, 1] to select “Copy” and

∫ To select another folder

press [OK].

After performing step 6–

1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Folder” and press [OK].

(

50, To register individual still pictures)

Copying using the copying list

2 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [OK].

[USB] > [HDD] [RAM]

Create List

DVD-RAM

Create List

DVD-RAM

Picture (JPEG)

Folder

103__DVD

\DCIM\100__DVD

001 100__DVD

002 101__DVD

003 102__DVD

While stopped

0001

----

0002

----

0003

----

0004

----

004 103__DVD

Insert the USB memory (> 13).

---

The menu is automatically displayed. (> above)

----

Page 01/01

Picture 0012 File 0012

Page 001/001

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Pictures

RETURN

( JPEG )” and press [OK].

You can also select folders with the numbered buttons.

e.g.,

Copy

Cancel All

[0] > [0] > [5]

Source

USB

1 ^{Copy Direction}

15: [0] > [1] > [5]

115: [1] > [1] > [5]

USB HDD

Destination

HDD

Copy Mode

PICTURE High Speed

≥The still pictures of different folders cannot be registered on the

same list.

Create List

3 Perform steps 4 – 8 on “Copying

using the copying list” (> 50)

To stop copying

Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.

Note

≥Copy Mode is fixed at “PICTURE High Speed”.

≥The structure of folders on the USB memory may not be the same

at the copy destination.

≥If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number of files/

folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (> 12), copying will

stop partway through.

≥You cannot copy the information about the picture rotation.

≥Still pictures copied from USB memories are grouped by the

shooting date in the HDD or DVD-RAM.

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Copying music to HDD

You can store the following formats of music data in this unit’s HDD.

Note

≥While recording, no other operations can be performed. Timer

recordings will not proceed.

≥Tracks recorded on the HDD cannot be transferred to a disc or

USB memory.

≥CDs which have SCMS (Serial Copy Management System)

restrictions cannot be recorded to the HDD.

Music CD (CD-DA)

When copying music CDs, this unit makes access to the internal

Gracenote^®Database to obtain title information. The album name,

track name and artist name are assigned automatically allowing you

find the track easily when playing back.

MP3/WMA

You can copy MP3 or WMA files from the USB memory or CD-R/CD-RW/

DVD-R/DVD-R DL.

Copying music from a USB memory or

CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-R DL

[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] (MP3/WMA) > [HDD]

About the Gracenote^®Database

You can copy MP3 or WMA files recorded on USB memory or CD-R/

CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-R DL to the HDD by file or folder.

The Gracenote^®Database is a database used to search and retrieve

CD title information.

≥One folder is recorded on the HDD as one group.

≥The maximum number of albums^§on HDD: 300

The maximum number of tracks on HDD: 3000

(Depends on the remaining capacity.)

When a CD is inserted or recording from a CD begins, the unit will

automatically search for and obtain information about the inserted

CD.

The Gracenote^®Database comes pre-installed on this unit, so titles

and artist information can be obtained. Please note however that the

newest CD titles, etc. may not be registered yet to the internal

database. This unit has an internal database containing information

for approximately 350,000 album titles.

If titles or pictures are recorded, then the number of albums^§that

can be recorded will be reduced.

Folders with music files (groups) copied to the HDD will be

treated as albums.

You can update the internal database (> 53).

While stopped

If there are CDs with very similar title information, then the incorrect

title information may be obtained. If no title suggestions are found,

then track name, album name and artist name will be blank.

In these cases, enter the CD title information manually, after

recording to the HDD has completed.

Insert the USB memory or

CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-R DL

(> 13).

The menu is automatically displayed.

e.g., [USB]

Copying music from a CD

USB device

[CD] > [HDD]

All tracks on the music CD (CD-DA) are recorded on the HDD.

(Cannot record track-by-track.)

Play Video ( DivX )

Play Pictures ( JPEG )

Copy All Pictures ( JPEG )

Copy Pictures ( JPEG )

Play Music ( MP3&WMA )

Copy Music ( MP3&WMA )

Update CD database on HDD

≥One CD is recorded on the HDD as one album.

≥Audio quality: LPCM

≥The maximum number of albums on HDD: 300

(Depends on the remaining capacity.)

If titles or pictures are recorded, then the number of albums that

can be recorded will be reduced.

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Music

Preparation

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.

( MP3&WMA )” and press [OK].

“Copy Direction” and “Copy Mode” are automatically set to

“USB#HDD”, “DVD#HDD” or “CD#HDD” and “MUSIC High

1 Insert a music CD.

Speed”, respectively.

The menu is automatically displayed.

3 Register MP3 or WMA files for copy.

≥If you are going to copy a registered list without making any

Play Music

Copy Music

changes to it (> step 4).

You can register MP3/WMA files or folders.

≥MP3/WMA files and folders cannot be registered on the

same list.

SELECT

RETURN

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Music”

Copy

Destination Capacity: 4343MB

Cancel All

and press [OK].

Track

Track/Folder

1 ^{Copy Direction}

No. Size

Name of item

New item (Total = 0)

The unit starts accessing the Gracenote^®Database and

searches for the title information.

USB HDD

Copy Mode

MUSIC High Speed

Create List

P O W E R E D B Y

Page 01/01

Create copy list.

Start Copying

OPTION

RETURN

∫ To register individual MP3/WMA files

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [OK].

4 Press [3, 4] to select the MP3/WMA file and press [;].

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select

all necessary items.

If search results indicate that multiple titles were found

Press [3, 4] to select the appropriate title and press [OK].

≥Press [;] again to cancel.

3 Press [2, 1] to select “Copy” and

≥The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If

you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at

a time.

press [OK].

Recording starts.

5 Press [OK].

≥To edit the copying list (> 53)

To stop recording

6 Press [2] to confirm.

Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.

≥If the recording is cancelled, then no tracks on the CD will be

recorded.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

∫ To register on a folder by folder basis

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Track / Folder” and press [OK].

To update the Gracenote^®Database

To update the database with information on CDs that were recently

released, follow the instructions below.

Copy

Destination Capacity: 4343MB

Cancel All

Track

Track/Folder

1 ^{Copy Direction}

No. Size

Name of item

New item (Total=0)

∫ Preparing the update data

USB ꢀꢁHDD

Copy Mode

Visit the following website.

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Folder” and press [OK].

4 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK].

5 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [;].

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select

all necessary items.

http://panasonic.net/pavc/support/gn/

Download the data to your USB memory.

≥USB memory 1 GB or larger is required.

≥Refer to the instruction on the website for more information.

≥Press [;] again to cancel.

∫ Updating the database on this unit

≥The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If

you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at

a time.

Turn on this unit.

Insert the USB memory (> 13).

The menu is automatically displayed.

6 Press [OK].

≥To edit the copying list (> below)

7 Press [2] to confirm.

USB device

Play Video ( DivX )

Play Pictures ( JPEG )

4 Press [3, 4] to select “Start

Copy All Pictures ( JPEG )

Copy Pictures ( JPEG )

Play Music ( MP3&WMA )

Copy Music ( MP3&WMA )

Update CD database on HDD

Copying” and press [OK].

≥For individual files only

When specifying an existing folder as the copying

destination

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Folder” and press [OK].

2 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [OK].

Press [3, 4] to select “Update CD database on HDD” and press

[OK].

Press [2, 1] to select “Update” and press [OK].

≥Updating takes up to 20 minutes.

≥Do not disconnect the USB memory and the AC mains lead

while updating.

When creating a new folder as the copying destination

1 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

2 Enter the folder name (> 44, Entering text).

≥Once started, you cannot cancel updating.

A message appears when updating is finished.

Press [OK].

5 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and

press [OK] to start copying.

Note

To stop copying

≥Timer recordings do not start while updating.

Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.

≥Updating overwrites the internal database forcibly regardless of

whether the data in the USB memory is the latest or not. Make sure

you download the latest version from the website.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

≥Some of the CD title information in the database may be deleted

after updating the database.

Note

≥The sequence in which the MP3/WMA files are registered on the

copy list may not be the same at the copy destination.

≥If MP3/WMA files are already contained inside the copy destination

folder, the new MP3/WMA files are recorded following the existing

MP3/WMA files.

≥No name will be assigned after copying a CD to HDD if the CD title

information of the CD is not registered in the database. Even if the

CD title information of that CD is added to the database by

updating later, the information will not be assigned to the track/

album already copied on the HDD. (The names will be still blank.)

≥Depending on the situation of Panasonic or Gracenote, upgrading

the Gracenote^®Database and providing it through the Web may be

discontinued without notice.

∫ To edit the copying list

Select the item in step 3–

Copying music from a USB memory or CD-R/CD-RW/

(for a MP3/WMA file) (

52,

Delete All

DVD-R/DVD-R DL) or 3–

(for a folder) (

above).

Add

1 Press [OPTION].

Delete

2 Press [3, 4] to select the operation and press

[OK].

Delete All:

Delete all items registered on the copying list.

Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

Add:

Add new items to the copying list.

Press [3, 4] to select the MP3/WMA file or folder and press [;].

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all

necessary items.

≥Press [;] again to cancel.

Press [OK].

Delete:

Delete the selected items.

Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

To cancel all registered copying settings and lists

After performing steps 1–2 (> 52, Copying music from a USB

memory or CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-R DL)

Press [3, 4] to select “Cancel All” and press [OK].

Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

≥The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following situations.

– When a file has been recorded or deleted at the copy source

– When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit,

remove the USB memory, open the tray, change the copy

direction, etc.

Note

≥If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number of

files/folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (> 12), copying

will stop partway through.

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting menus

Using on-screen menus/Status message

Audio attribute

Signal type

Using on-screen menus

LPCM/ Digital/DTS/MPEG:

k (kHz):

b (bit):

ch (channel):

Sampling frequency

Number of bits

Number of channels

Common procedures

Language

1 Press [DISPLAY].

ENG: English

FRA: French

DEU: German

ITA: Italian

ESP: Spanish

NLD: Dutch

DAN: Danish

POR: Portuguese

RUS: Russian

JPN: Japanese

CHI: Chinese

KOR: Korean

MAL: Malay

THA: Thai

POL: Polish

CES: Czech

SLK: Slovak

HUN: Hungarian

FIN: Finnish

Disc

Digital 2/0 ch

Soundtrack

Play

Off

Subtitle

Picture

Sound

Other

L R

Audio channel

SVE: Swedish

NOR: Norwegian

¢:

Others

VIE: Vietnamese

Item

Setting

≥Depending on the condition of the unit (playing, stopped,

etc.) and disc contents, there are some items that you

cannot select or change.

Play menu—Change the play sequence

This function works only when the elapsed play time is displayed.

Select the item for repeat play. Depending on the disc, the items that

can be selected will differ.

2 Press [3, 4] to select the menu and

press [1].

Repeat Play

3 Press [3, 4] to select the item and

≥All

≥Chapter

[CD] [VCD]

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]

[+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]

press [1].

≥Group

≥PL (Playlist)

≥Title

MP3/WMA (except [USB])

[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›]

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]

[+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]

4 Press [3, 4] to select the setting.

≥Some items can be changed by pressing [OK].

To clear the on-screen menus

Press [DISPLAY].

≥Track

[CD] [VCD] and MP3/WMA (except [USB])

Select “Off” to cancel.

Disc menu—Setting the disc content

Picture menu—Change the picture quality

Soundtrack^§

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]

The disc’s audio attributes appear.

[DVD-V]

Select the audio and language (> right, Audio attribute,

Language).

DivX

Select the soundtrack number.

≥Soundtrack numbers are displayed even when there is only one

audio type.

Subtitle^§

Playback NR

Reduces noise and picture degradation.

Progressive^§(> 81)

Select “On” to enable progressive output.

Select “Off” if the picture is stretched horizontally.

Transfer^§[When “Progressive” (> above) is set to “On”.]

Select the method of conversion for progressive output to suit

the type of title being played (> 81, Film and video).

[DVD-V]

When the output signal is PAL

(When the tray is opened, the setting will return to “Auto”.)

Turn the subtitle on/off and select the language (> right,

Language).

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›] (Only

discs that contain subtitle on/off information)

Turn the subtitle on/off.

≥Subtitle on/off information cannot be recorded using this unit.

DivX

Turn the subtitle on/off and select “Text” or the subtitle number.

≥“Text” or subtitle numbers are displayed even if there are not

multiple subtitles.

Angle^§[DVD-V]

≥Auto:

≥Video:

≥Film:

Automatically detects the film and video

content, and appropriately converts it.

Select when using “Auto”, and the content is

distorted.

Select this if the edges of the

film content appear jagged or

rough when “Auto” is selected.

However, if the video content

is distorted as shown in the

illustration to the right, then

select “Auto”.

Change the number to select an angle.

Audio channel [HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD] and DivX

(> 28, Changing audio during play)

Source Select (DivX)

When the output signal is NTSC

≥Auto 1

(normal):

≥Auto 2:

Automatically detects the film and video

content, and appropriately converts it.

In addition to “Auto 1”, automatically detects

film contents with different frame rates and

appropriately converts it.

Select when using “Auto 1” and “Auto 2”, and

the content is distorted.

≥Automatic:

The constructing method of the DivX contents is

automatically distinguished and output.

≥Interlace:

Select when the disc contents were recorded using interlace.

≥Progressive:

≥Video:

Input NR

Select when the disc contents were recorded using

progressive.

Reduces the noise while recording (Except analogue

channels).

PBC (Playback control > 81) [VCD]

≥Automatic:

Noise reduction only works on picture input from a video

tape.

≥On:

Noise reduction works for input video.

≥Off:

Noise reduction is off. You can record the input signal as it is.

Indicates whether menu play (playback control) is on or off.

With some discs, you may only be able to make changes using

the menus (> 15) on the disc.

≥The display changes according to the disc content. You cannot

change when there is no recording.

Only when you have set “Progressive” to “On” in the Setup menu

(> 63).

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sound menu—Change the DVB multi audio and

sound effect

Status messages

DVB Multi Audio

[Digital channel only]

Press [STATUS ].

The display changes each time you press the button.

If more than one audio channel is output, you can set the

desired channel before recording.

≥DVB Multi Audio cannot be selected during playback or

recording.

≥Depending on the broadcast, the items that can be selected

will differ.

Selected drive status/type of disc or USB

memory

HDD

The remaining time appears here while stopped.

REC

PLAY

Recording or play status/input channel

≥English

≥Italian

≥Spanish

≥German

≥French

1 DVB

ABC

Channel (Analogue broadcast only)

The name of the station (Digital broadcast only).

≥Original^§

L R

^§“Original” is displayed when the original language is available

Selected audio type

in a broadcast.

DVD REC

Recording drive/Copy progress indicator

Dialogue Enhancer

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V]

[-RW‹VR›] and DivX

(Dolby Digital, 3-channel or over only, including a centre channel)

Title number and elapsed time during play/

Recording mode

Available recording time and

recording mode

The volume of the centre channel is raised to make dialogue

easier to hear.

Date and time

Other menu—Change the display position

Position

ꢆ

Remain

18:53:50 11.10.

13:50 XP

ꢆ T1 0:05.14 XP ꢆ T2 0:00.10 XP

1–5:

Title number and elapsed time during recording/

Recording mode

The higher the setting the lower the on-screen menu moves.

≥When using Pause Live TV

The time when the picture currently displayed on the

television was broadcasted

Play 15:05:13

Live 15:10:46

Current time

No display

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HDD and disc management

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]

Setting the protection

[RAM]

Common procedures

Preparation

≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive.

Preparation

≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.

After performing steps 1–3 (> left)

While stopped

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Disc

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

Protection” and press [OK].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and

2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and

press [OK].

FUNCTION MENU

HDD

Remain 30:00 SP

Playback

Recording

Delete

DVD

Management

DVD-RAM

Playlists

Titles

Used

Remain 5:38 (EP)

Flexible Rec

DV Auto Rec

HDD Management

Setup

0 : 22

Copy

Disc Name

TV Guide

Others

Disc Protection

Delete all titles

Drive Select

RETURN

SELECT

Format Disc

RETURN

3 Press [3, 4] to select “HDD

The lock symbol appears closed when the disc is write-

protected.

Management” or “DVD Management”

and press [OK].

e.g., [RAM]

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

DVD

Management

DVD-RAM

Titles

Used

0 : 22

Remain 5:38 (EP)

Disc Name

Disc Protection

Delete all titles

Off

Cartridge-protection

SELECT

For a DVD-RAM with a cartridge

≥With the write-protect tab in the protect position,

play automatically starts when inserted in the

Format Disc

RETURN

≥When HDD has been selected, “Delete all titles” and

“Format HDD” are displayed.

PROTECT

unit.

Providing a name for a disc

[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

You can provide a name for each disc.

Preparation

≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.

≥[RAM] Release protection (> above, Setting the protection).

After performing steps 1–3 (> left)

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Disc Name”

and press [OK].

(> 44, Entering text)

≥The disc name is displayed in the DVD Management window.

≥[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] With a finalised disc, the name is

displayed on the Top Menu.

≥[+RW] The disc name is displayed only if you play the disc on other

equipment after creating top menu.

Documentary

My favorite

01/02

DVD

Management

DVD-RAM

Titles

Used

0 : 22

Remain 5:38 (

Chapter

Note

≥[-R] Once a name is provided to a disc, it is not possible to record

still images to that disc.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Deleting all titles and playlists—Delete

all titles

Deleting all the contents—Format

[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]

[HDD] [RAM]

[+R] [+R]DL] (New disc only)

Preparation

≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.

≥[RAM] Release protection (> 56, Setting the protection).

≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.

≥[RAM] Release protection (> 56, Setting the protection).

After performing steps 1–3 (> 56, Common procedures)

Note

Formatting deletes all contents (including computer data),

and they cannot be restored. Check carefully before

proceeding. The contents are deleted when you format a disc

even if you have set protection.

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete all

titles” and press [OK].

After performing steps 1–3 (> 56, Common procedures)

2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and

press [OK].

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Format HDD”

3 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and

or “Format Disc” and press [OK].

press [OK].

2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and

A message appears when finished.

press [OK].

4 Press [OK].

3 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

press [OK].

A message appears when formatting is finished.

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

Note

≥Formatting normally takes a few minutes; however, it may

take up to a maximum of 70 minutes ([RAM]).

≥Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while formatting.

This can render the disc unusable.

Note

≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be

restored. Make certain before proceeding.

≥Deleting all video titles will result in all playlists also being deleted.

≥Still picture data (JPEG), music data or computer data cannot be

deleted.

4 Press [OK].

Note

≥Delete does not work if one or more titles are protected.

≥When a disc has been formatted using this unit, it may not be

possible to use it on any other equipment.

≥[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] Formatting cannot be performed.

≥You can format DVD-RW only as DVD-Video format on this unit.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HDD and disc management

Note

When finalising a high-speed recording compatible disc, it may take

longer than displayed on the confirmation screen (approximately

four times).

Selecting the background style—Top

[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

You can select the background that will be displayed as the DVD-

Video top menu after finalising or creating Top Menu ([+RW]).

After finalising

≥[-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] The disc becomes play-only and you

can no longer record or edit.

≥[-RW‹V›] You can record and edit the disc after formatting

(> 57) although it becomes play-only after finalising.

≥When copying in high speed, chapters will be replicated.

≥[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] Chapters are created automatically ([-R] [-RW‹V›]

about 5-minute^§[+R] about 8-minute^§), if

–the titles were directly recorded to the disc.

–the titles were copied using any mode other than the high

speed mode.

Preparation

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.

After performing steps 1–3 (> 56, Common procedures)

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu”

and press [OK].

^§This time varies greatly depending on the condition and mode

of recording.

≥There is a pause of several seconds between titles and chapters

during play.

2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the

background and press [OK].

Top Menu List

Before

finalising

After

finalising

Recording/Editing/Entering name

Play on other players

≤

–

Display after finalising

–

≤

Thumbnail

(Still picture)

≥You cannot finalise discs recorded on other manufacturer’s

equipment.

≥If you finalise discs recorded on Panasonic equipment other than

this unit, the background selected as “Top Menu” may not be

displayed.

≥Discs finalised on this unit may not be playable on other players

due to the condition of the recording.

Title Name

≥You can change thumbnails displayed in the top menu. (> 39,

Change Thumbnail)

≥[-R] This function cannot be used for discs with still images

recorded on them.

Selecting whether to show the Top

Menu first—Auto-Play Select

[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

You can select whether to show the top menu after finalising.

Creating Top Menu—Create Top Menu

[+RW]

+RW discs contain no Top Menu data. Top Menu is a convenient

function. We recommend you create the menu before playing a +RW

disc on other equipment.

Preparation

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.

After performing steps 1–3 (> 56, Common procedures)

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Auto-Play

Select” and press [OK].

You cannot use the Top Menu for playing on this unit.

Make selections from “Top Menu” and “Auto-Play Select” (> left)

before creating top menu.

Preparation

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu” or

“Title 1” and press [OK].

After performing steps 1–3 (> 56, Common procedures)

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create Top

Menu” and press [OK].

Top Menu: The top menu appears first.

Title 1:

The disc content is played without displaying

the top menu.

≥[-R] This function cannot be used for discs with still images

recorded on them.

2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and

press [OK].

Enabling discs to be played on other

equipment—Finalise

[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]

Make selections from “Top Menu” and “Auto-Play Select” (> above)

before finalising the disc.

3 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and

press [OK].

Creating Top Menu starts. You cannot cancel creating.

Creating Top Menu can take a few minutes.

4 Press [OK].

Preparation

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.

Note

After performing steps 1–3 (> 56, Common procedures)

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Finalise” and

press [OK].

≥You can record or edit discs after creating the Top Menu. But the

created menu is deleted when you record or edit disc. In such

cases, create the Top Menu again by using “Create Top Menu”.

2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

press [OK].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

3 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and

press [OK].

A message appears when finalising is finished.

Note

≥You cannot cancel finalising.

≥Finalising takes up to 15 minutes.

([-R]DL] [+R]DL] Finalising takes up to 60 minutes.)

≥Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while finalising.

This will render the disc unusable.

4 Press [OK].

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Changing the unit’s settings

You can change the unit’s settings using Setup menu.

≥The settings remain intact even if you switch the unit to standby.

3 Press [OK] to save the Favourite.

Deleting a channel from a Favourite does not affect the channel

itself. You can still select the channel from the “All Channels”

category.

Common procedures

To change the name of a Favourite in the “Favourite”

While stopped

column

1 Press [1]^§.

2 Press the “Red” button.

(> 44, Entering text)

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and

^§When the station name of the “All Channels” column is highlighted

press [OK].

∫ Auto-Setup Restart

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and

Download from TV

press [OK].

You can restart auto channel setting if set up (> 9) fails for some

reason.

Menus

Options

Tabs

However, if you perform “Auto-Setup Restart”, the order of analogue

channels will change.

Setup

Remote Control

Clock

Setting for Standby

DivX Registration

System Update

Initialize

DVD 1

Select “Download from TV” when you connect the unit to a VIERA

Link (HDAVI Control 3 or later) compatible TV with an HDMI cable.

Tuning

Disc

Picture

Sound

Display

Connection

Others

When the confirmation screen appears

1 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

When the Region Selection screen appears on the television

2 Press [3, 4] to select the region and press [OK].

TAB

SELECT

RETURN

You can also use the following method to restart Auto Setup.

When the unit is on and stopped

Press and hold [X CH] and [CH W] on the main unit until the

Auto-Setup screen appears.

All the settings except for the ratings level, ratings password, clock

settings and remote control code return to the factory preset. The

timer recording programmes are also cancelled.

4 Press [3, 4] to select the tab and

press [1].

5 Press [3, 4] to select the menu and

press [OK].

∫ Settings for Digital Channels

Press [OK] to show the following settings.

6 Press [3, 4] to select the option and

press [OK].

DVB Manual Tuning

You can set channels manually that the DVB Auto Setup could not

complete successfully.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

1 Press [3, 4] to select “DVB Manual Tuning” and press [OK].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

DVB Manual Tuning

Physical Channel

Signal Quality

Signal Strength

[CH35]

578,5 MHz

Channel Name

Type

New

No.

Tuning

∫ Favourites Edit

You can create four Favourites of channels for making viewing and

recording easier. Editing these Favourites does not affect the

channel setting itself.

TV : 0

Radio : 0

Data : 0

START SCAN

OFFSET

RETURN

≥Timer recording may not work correctly if you edit the Favourite

during timer recording standby.

2 Press [3, 4] to select the channel you want to set.

3 Press [2, 1] to adjust the frequency.

≥The frequency rises and falls in steps of 0.5 MHz.

≥Adjust the frequency by checking the signal strength and signal

quality displays.

Press the “Green” button to

Favourites Editor

select the Favourite.

All Channels

2 ABC

Favourite 1

20 ABC HDTV

[Refer to “Signal Condition” (> 60) for signal quality and signal

strength.]

4 Press [OK] to start scan.

The set channel is displayed in the table.

5 Press [EXIT] and press [W X CH] to check that applicable

channels have been selected.

Favourite Select

Add

Add All

SELECT

RETURN

Add New DVB Channels

You can search for newly added terrestrial digital channels to

receive.

To add channels to a Favourite

1 Press [3, 4] to select the channel in the “All Channels” column

and press the “Yellow” button.

≥Repeat this step to add other channels.

Press [

4] to select “Add New DVB Channels” and press [OK].

≥Press the “Blue” button to add all the available channels to the

Favourite. (This function is available only when no channels

have been added to the Favourite.)

The unit starts searching for

newly available terrestrial

digital channels. This takes

about 5 minutes.

Add New DVB Channels

Scan

CH 6

2 Press [OK] to save the Favourite.

Channel Name

Type

Quality

To change the order of channels of a Favourite

1 Press [1]^§.

A message is displayed

when the search is finished.

2 Press [3, 4] to select the channel in the “Favourite” column to

move and press the “Green” button.

“No new DVB channels found.” is displayed when no new

channels can be found.

3 Press [3, 4] to select the new position of the channel and press

the “Green” button.

2 Press [OK] to save the newly found channels.

≥Repeat the steps 2– 3 to move other channels.

4 Press [OK] to save the Favourite.

To delete channels on a Favourite

1 Press [1]^§.

2 Press [3, 4] to select the channel in the “Favourite” column and

press the “Yellow” button.

≥Repeat this step to delete other channels.

≥Press the “Blue” button to delete all the channels from the

Favourite.

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Changing the unit’s settings

Signal Condition

∫ Settings for Analogue Channels

You can check the quality and strength of digital broadcast signals.

Realign the aerial if you are receiving a poor signal.

Press [OK] to show the following setting.

Manual Tuning

You can delete analogue channels and set the analogue channel

details.

When “Signal Condition” is displayed in grey and cannot be

selected:

Press [EXIT] to exit the screen.

Press [W X CH] to select a digital channel. “D” appears on the

unit’s display.

Press [OK] to show Manual Tuning screen.

Manual Tuning

Display the Setup menu again (> 59).

Pos Channel CH

ARD

ZDF

Press [3, 4] to select “Signal

Condition” and press [OK].

The quality and strength of the

signal are shown.

Press [W X CH] to select the

channel.

DVB Signal Condition

DVB Channel

HR3

BR3

[CH14] 5 BR3

Signal Quality

–

SELECT

Signal Strength

RETURN

Channel

RETURN

Delete

Signal Quality

Below 2 (display red):

The signal quality is so poor that there may be interference in the

pictures and sound.

2–5 (display orange):

The signal quality is basically adequate, but brief interference in the

pictures and sound is possible in isolated case.

Over 5 (display green):

To delete a programme position

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a programme position and press the

“Red” button.

To change the tuning settings for individual programme

position

1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a programme position and press

[OK].

Optimum picture and sound quality.

Pos

Channel

901

ARD

Manual

Tuning

Signal Strength

The display for signal strength is grey. “0” means signal strength 0%,

“10” means signal strength 100%.

If the signal is too strong, the display will change from grey to red.

Reduce the signal amplification at your aerial.

≥When the signal is weak:

Fine Tuning Auto

Mono

Off

SELECT

RETURN

–adjust the position and direction of the aerial.

–adjust the aerial reception with “DVB Manual Tuning” in the

Setup menu (> 59).

–check that the current digital broadcast channel is correctly

broadcasting.

RETURN : leave

2 Press [3, 4] to select an item and press [1].

Pos

Programme position in the table

(You cannot change the programme position.)

Channel

To enter or change the Channel of a TV

station

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to enter station name

and press [OK].

If the station name needs a blank space,

select the blank between “Z” and “¢”.

To enter newly available TV stations or

change the CH number of an already tuned

TV station

Press [3, 4] or the numbered buttons to

enter the CH number of the desired TV

station.

Wait a few moments until the desired TV

station has been tuned.

After the desired TV station is tuned, press

[OK].

Fine Tuning

Mono

To obtain the best tuning condition

Press [3, 4] to adjust the best tuning

condition and press [OK].

≥Press [1] to return to “Auto”.

To select the type of sound to be recorded

Press [3, 4] to select “On” if the stereo

sound is distorted due to inferior reception

conditions, or if you want to record the normal

(mono) sound during a stereo or bilingual

broadcast, and press [OK].

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter Creation

Set the automatic Chapter Creation method. (> 38)

Disc

(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)

[Automatic]

[Off]

[5 minutes]

Settings for Playback

≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.

No chapter start points are set.

Rec for High Speed Copy

Ratings

You can copy recorded titles from the HDD to DVD-R, DVD-R

DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW using

high speed mode. However, screen size, etc. is restricted

(> below).

Set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play.

Follow the on-screen instructions. Enter a 4-digit password with

the numbered buttons when the password screen is shown.

Do not forget your password.

We recommend turning the setting “Off” if high speed copy to

DVD-R, etc. is not necessary when recording a programme.

This setting is effective when recording from a television

programme or external equipment (including DV equipment), or

when copying from a finalised DVD-Video disc.

Setting ratings (When level 8 is selected)

[8 No Limit]

[1 to 7]

All DVD-Video can be played.

Prohibits play of DVD-Video with corresponding

ratings recorded on them.

[On]

You can high-speed copy to DVD-R, etc. Press

[2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

≥The following restrictions are applied to recorded

titles.

– Recordings are made using the aspect ratio set

in “Aspect for Recording” (> left).

[0 Lock All]

Prohibits play of all DVD-Video.

≥Changing settings (When level 0 to 7 is selected)

[Unlock Recorder]

[Change Level]

[Change Password]

[Temporary Unlock]

– Select the type of audio in advance from

“Bilingual Audio Selection” (> 62).

– You are no longer able to switch the audio

when watching a programme on an input

channel on the TV connected to this unit.

Soundtrack

[English]

[Spanish]

[German]

[French]

[Italian]

[Original]

The original language of each disc will be

selected.

[Off]

[Other ¢¢¢¢]

DVD Speed for High Speed Copy

Select the speed of high-speed copying (When using high-speed

copy compatible DVD-RAM 5X, DVD-R, +R 8X or +RW 4X

discs).

Subtitle

[Automatic]

If the language selected for “Soundtrack” is not

available, subtitles of that language will

automatically appear if available on that disc.

[Maximum]

[Normal ( Silent )]

The noise generated by this unit is less

than when “Maximum” is selected, however

the time required for copying will double

(approximately).

[English]

[German]

[French]

[Italian]

[Spanish]

[Other ¢¢¢¢]^§

Menus

[English]

Start Recording Time

[German]

[French]

[Italian]

This function sets the timer recording to start earlier than the TV

Guide time.

[Spanish]

[1 min earlier]

[10 min earlier]

[3 min earlier]

[Off]

[5 min earlier]

[Other ¢¢¢¢]

Enter a code (> 71) with the numbered buttons.

Finish Recording Time

When the selected language is not available on the disc, the

default language is played. There are discs where you can only

switch the language from the menu screen (> 15).

This function sets the timer recording to stop later than the TV

Guide time.

[1 min later]

[3 min later]

[Off]

[5 min later]

[DVD-V]

[10 min later]

Choose the language for audio, subtitle and disc menus.

≥Some discs start in a certain language despite any changes you

make here.

Picture

Settings for Recording

(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)

≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.

Comb Filter

Select the picture sharpness when recording.

The setting is fixed with “On” if you set “TV System” to “NTSC”

(> 63).

Recording time in EP mode

Select the maximum number of hours for recording in EP mode

(> 20, Recording modes and approximate recording times).

[On] Pictures become clear and vivid. Normally, use this setting.

[Off] Select it when recording noisy pictures.

[EP ( 6Hours )]

You can record for 6 hours on an unused

4.7 GB disc.

[EP ( 8Hours )]

You can record for 8 hours on an unused

4.7 GB disc.

Still Mode

Select the type of picture shown when you pause play (> 81,

≥The sound quality is better when using “EP ( 6Hours )” than

when using “EP ( 8Hours )”.

Frames and fields).

[Automatic]

Aspect for Recording

Sets the aspect ratio when recording or copying.

[Field]

Select if jittering occurs when “Automatic” is

selected. (The picture is coarser.)

[Automatic] The programme will be recorded in the original

aspect used when recording started (including

[Frame]

Select if small text or fine patterns cannot be seen

clearly when “Automatic” is selected. (The picture

is clearer and finer.)

when recording started at a commercial, etc.).

[16:9]

[4:3]

Seamless Play

≥When recording or copying to the HDD or DVD-RAM with “Rec

for High Speed Copy” set to “Off”, programme will be recorded

in the original aspect ratio.

≥In the following cases, even when set to “Automatic” or “16:9”,

recordings will be made or copied in 4:3.

–[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] When the recording mode is set to “EP” or

“FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.

–When recording or copying to a +R, +R DL and +RW.

High-speed copy does not work for the titles recorded in 16:9 even

if they were recorded with “Rec for High Speed Copy” set to “On”.

Select the play mode between playlist chapter segments and

partially deleted titles.

[On] The chapters in playlists are played seamlessly. This does

not work when there are several audio types included on

the playlist and when using Quick View (PLAYa1.3).

Additionally, the positioning of chapter segments may

change slightly.

[Off] The points where chapters in playlists change are played

accurately, but the picture may freeze for a moment.

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Changing the unit’s settings

Audio Mode for XP Recording

Choose the audio type when recording or copying with XP mode.

Sound

(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)

[Dolby Digital] (> 81) [LPCM] (> 81)

≥The picture quality of LPCM recordings may be lower than that of

normal XP mode recordings.

≥The audio recording becomes Dolby Digital even if you selected

LPCM when using a recording mode other than XP.

≥When recording a bilingual broadcast, select the type of audio in

advance from “Bilingual Audio Selection” (> left).

Dynamic Range Compression

[DVD-V] (Dolby Digital only)

Change the dynamic range for late night viewing.

[On]

[Off]

Bilingual Audio Selection

Audio Mode for DV Input

(Analogue broadcast only)

You can select the kind of audio when recording from the unit’s DV

input terminal (> 22).

Select whether to record the main or secondary audio type when:

≥Recording or copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-

Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW.

≥“Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”.

≥Recording or copying sound in LPCM (> right, “Audio Mode for

XP Recording”).

[Stereo 1] Records audio (L1, R1).

[Stereo 2] Records added audio such as narration (L2, R2)

subsequent to original recording.

[Mix]

Records both Stereo 1 and Stereo 2.

[M 1]

[M 2]

≥When recording bilingual broadcast, select the type of audio in

advance from “Bilingual Audio Selection” (> left).

≥You cannot select the audio on this unit when recording from an

external source, such as when copying from a video cassette

recorder (except from DV equipment connected to this unit’s DV

input terminal). Select the audio on the other equipment.

≥When recording from the unit’s DV terminal, select the type of

audio recording from “Audio Mode for DV Input” (> right).

Display

(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)

Digital Audio Output

On-Screen Messages

Change the settings when you have connected equipment through

this unit’s DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal (> 67).

≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.

Choose the approximate time until the digital channel information

screen (> 14) disappears automatically.

The length of time the control panel (> 37) is displayed can also

be changed, but “Off” does not work.

PCM Down Conversion

[Off] (The digital channel information is not displayed.)

Select how to output audio with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz.

≥Signals are converted to 48 kHz despite the settings below if

the signals have a sampling frequency of over 96 kHz, or the

disc has copy protection.

[3 sec.]

[5 sec.]

[7 sec.]

[10 sec.]

Grey Background

Select “Off” if you do not want to have the unit show the grey

background when tuner reception is weak.

[On] Signals are converted to 48 kHz. (Choose when the

connected equipment cannot process signals with a

sampling frequency of 96 kHz.)

[On]

[Off]

[Off] Signals are output as 96 kHz. (Choose when the

connected equipment can process signals with a

sampling frequency of 96 kHz.)

FL Display

Changes the brightness of the unit’s display.

This setting is fixed with “Automatic” if you set “Power Save”

(> 64) to “On”.

Dolby Digital^§

Select how to output the signal.

[Bright]

[Dim]

Select “Bitstream” if the connected equipment decodes the signal.

Select “PCM” if this unit decodes the signal and outputs it as 2

channels.

[Automatic]

The display turns dark during play and disappears

when the unit is turned off. While using this mode,

the standby power consumption can be reduced.

≥Not making the proper settings may result in noise.

New Channel Message (> 14)

[Bitstream]

When connected to equipment with a built-in Dolby

Digital decoder.

When a new DVB channel is added this unit will be informed

automatically. Then the confirmation message appears. If you

select “Yes” on the display, Auto-Setup starts (all channel settings

are deleted. The timer recording programmes are also cancelled.).

[PCM]

When connected to equipment without a built-in

Dolby Digital decoder.

DTS^§

[Automatic]

Select how to output the signal.

[Off]

The Channel Messages are not shown.

Select “Bitstream” if the connected equipment decodes the

signal.

Select “PCM” if this unit decodes the signal and outputs it as 2

channels.

Pause Live TV Icon

Select “Off” if you do not want to have the unit show the on-screen

icon while using the Pause Live TV function.

≥Not making the proper settings may result in noise.

[On]

[Off]

[Bitstream]

When connected to equipment with a built-in DTS

decoder.

Screen Saver

[PCM]

When connected to equipment without a built-in

DTS decoder.

[On] When this unit is not operated for approximately 5 minutes

while the screen is being displayed, the screen saver is

displayed. To return to the previous screen, press [OK].

MPEG^§

Select how to output the signal.

[Off]

Select “Bitstream” if the connected equipment decodes the signal.

Select “PCM” if this unit decodes the signal and outputs it as 2

channels.

FUNCTION MENU Display

[On] When the unit is turned on, the FUNCTION MENU will be

≥Not making the proper settings may result in noise.

displayed. (> 7)

[Bitstream]

When connected to equipment with a built-in

MPEG decoder.

[Off]

[PCM]

When connected to equipment without a built-in

MPEG decoder.

Refer to the operating instructions for connected devices to verify

whether or not they can decode each of the audio formats.

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HDMI Settings

≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.

Connection

(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)

Depending on the connected equipment, some items may be

shaded in grey on the display and cannot be selected, or you may

not be able to change the settings.

HDMI Video Format

You can only select items compatible with the connected

equipment. This setting normally does not need to be changed.

However if you are concerned about output picture quality, it may

be improved by changing the setting.

TV Aspect

Set to match the type of television connected.

≥To enjoy High Quality Video up-converted to 1080p, you need

to connect the unit directly to 1080p compatible HDTV. If this

unit is connected to an HDTV through other equipment, it must

also be 1080p compatible.

[16:9]

When connected to a 16:9 widescreen television.

[Pan & Scan]

When connected to a 4:3 aspect

television, side picture is trimmed

for 16:9 picture.

[576i/480i] [576p/480p]

[1080p]

[720p]

[1080i]

When setting video output to “1080p”, we

recommend using High Speed HDMI Cables that

have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover) and

are less than 5 meters to prevent video distortion

etc.

[Letterbox]

When connected to a 4:3 aspect

television. 16:9 picture is shown in

the letterbox style.

Progressive

[Automatic] Automatically selects the output resolution best

suited to the connected television (1080p, 1080i,

720p, 576p/480p or 576i/480i).

You can enjoy progressive video by connecting this unit’s

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminals to an LCD/plasma television

or LCD projector compatible with progressive scan.

Aspect for 4:3 Video

To play a 4:3 title when connected with an HDMI cable, set how

to show pictures on a 16:9 widescreen television.

This setting is fixed with “Off” if you set “AV1 Output” to “RGB 1

( without component )” or “RGB 2 ( without component )”.

[On]

[Off]

[4:3]

Picture output expands left or right.

Note

≥When connected to a regular television (CRT: Cathode ray tube)

or a multi system television using PAL mode, even if it is

progressive compatible, progressive output can cause some

flickering. Turn off “Progressive” if you are concerned about it

(> 54).

≥Picture will not be displayed correctly if connected to an

incompatible television.

[16:9]

Picture is output as original aspect with

side panels.

Digital Audio Output

[HDMI and Optical]

[Optical Only]

Select when this unit is connected to an

TV System

amplifier with an optical digital audio

cable and connected to a TV with an

HDMI cable and you want to enjoy the

highest quality of audio from discs

(> 67).

Change the setting to match the equipment you are connecting

with, or to match the title when there are both PAL and NTSC titles

on the HDD.

[PAL]

≥Select when connecting to a PAL or Multi-system

television. Titles recorded using NTSC are played as

PAL 60.

VIERA Link

Set to use “HDAVI Control” function when connected with an

HDMI cable to a device that supports “HDAVI Control”.

≥Select to record television programmes and PAL input

from other equipment.

≥[HDD] Select when playing a PAL input title recorded on

the HDD.

[On]

[Off]

Select when you do not want to use “HDAVI Control”.

[NTSC] ≥Select when connecting to a NTSC television.

Television programmes cannot be recorded properly.

≥Select to record NTSC input from other equipment.

≥[HDD] Select when playing a NTSC input title recorded

on the HDD.

AV1 Output

Set according to the terminal of the connected TV.

Select “Video ( with component )” or “S Video ( with component )”

for component output (progressive output).

If this unit is connected with an HDMI cable, you cannot select

“RGB 1 ( without component )” or “RGB 2 ( without component )”.

Note

≥This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have

PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can

be recorded onto the HDD.)

[Video ( with component )]

Select when a TV is connected that can receive a composite signal.

≥If “NTSC” has been selected, the TV Guide system cannot be

used.

≥A title recorded on the HDD with different TV system cannot be

played with the setting as is. A disc with different TV system may

not be also played with the setting as is, only when recording or

on standby for the timer recording.

In those cases, you will be able to playback by changing the “TV

System” settings. But to prevent the failure of the timer recording,

change back the settings before the recording starts.

[S Video ( with component )]

Select when a TV is connected that can receive an S Video

signal.

[RGB 1 ( without component )]

Select when a TV is connected that can receive an RGB signal. If

you always would like to view the picture from the unit in RGB

signal, select this mode. The TV screen will automatically switch

to display the picture from the unit when the unit is turned on.

[RGB 2 ( without component )]

Select when a TV is connected that can receive an RGB signal. If

you would like to switch to display the picture from the unit only

when playback or viewing menus, select this mode.

To change the setting all at once (PAL!#NTSC)

While stopped, keep pressing [∫] and [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the

main unit at the same time for 5 or more seconds.

AV2 Input

Set according to the output signal of the connected equipment.

[Video]

[S Video]

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Changing the unit’s settings

Setting for Standby

≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.

Others

(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)

Power Save

Remote Control

Change the remote control code on the main unit and the remote

control (the two must match) if you place other Panasonic products

close together.

[On] Power consumption is minimized when the unit is turned

to standby (> 80).

[Off] This sets to Quick Start Mode.

[DVD 1]

Use “DVD 1”, the factory set code, under normal circumstances.

Press [ ] to select the code (“DVD 1”, “DVD 2” or “DVD 3”)

[DVD 2]

[DVD 3]

≥Refer to the chart for the Power Save function features (> 9)

when the unit is turned off.

Auto Standby

Set the time to automatically turn the unit off.

After the unit has finished operating, the unit will be turned off

once the set time has passed.

and press [OK].

Remote Control

Setup

[2 hours]

[Off]

[4 hours]

[6 hours]

Press “” and “OK” together

for more than 5 seconds on the remote

control.

Tuning

Disc

The unit will not automatically turn off.

Picture

DivX Registration

To change the code on the remote control

2 While pressing [OK], press and hold the numbered button

([1], [2] or [3]) for more than 5 seconds.

3 Press [OK].

You need this registration code to purchase and play DivX Video-

on-Demand (VOD) content (> 31).

System Update

In order to update this unit’s software, the TV Guide download, and

to support system changes made by broadcasts, this unit

periodically performs software updates.

∫ When the following indicator appears on the

unit’s display

The unit’s remote control code

Press [OK] to show the following settings.

Change the code on the remote

control to match the main unit’s

(> step 2).

≥Update data and TV Guide download information are sent by an

unscheduled digital broadcast. In order to receive these updates,

you must be able to receive digital broadcasts.

≥An update will take approximately 60 minutes. While the update

is in progress, “SW-DL” appears on the unit’s display. You cannot

operate the unit until the update is complete. Removing the AC

mains lead while the update is in progress may damage the unit.

≥TV Guide download will take approximately 60 minutes. While

the TV Guide download is in progress, “GUIDE” appears on the

unit’s display. The TV Guide download can be interrupted by

switching on the unit.

Note

Executing “Shipping Condition” in the Setup menu returns the main

unit code to “DVD 1”. Change the remote control code to 1

(> step 2).

Clock

This unit usually obtains time and date information from digital

broadcasts and automatically corrects the time several times a

day. However, if the time is not set correctly, use the settings listed

in the method below.

TV Guide Download in Standby

[On] When you set this unit to standby mode, TV Guide data is

downloaded automatically.

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Off” of “Automatic” and press

[OK].

[Off]

e.g., This screen appears

Software Update in Standby

Clock

while receiving a digital

Automatic

Off

Region Selection

[On]

When you set this unit to standby mode, software

updates are downloaded automatically.

broadcast.

Queensland

Time

Date

[Off]

11 . 12 . 2009

TV Guide/Software search period

Please set the clock.

OK: access RETURN: leave

CHANGE

Selects the time to automatically perform TV Guide download

and updates when the unit is set to standby mode. This can only

be set when “TV Guide Download in Standby” and “Software

Update in Standby” is set to “On”.

RETURN

2 Press [2, 1] to select the item you want to change.

The items change as follows:

≥If there is a programmed recording set for the time you have

selected, the programmed recording will be given priority.

Hour!#Minute!#Second!#Day!#Month!#Year

^-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------J

Reset the clock regularly to maintain accuracy.

(Monthly accuracy +/– 15 seconds.)

The unit will give priority to searching for TV

Guide download and update data at midnight.

[Automatic]

[02:00–06:00] [06:00–10:00] [10:00–14:00]

[14:00–18:00] [18:00–22:00] [22:00–02:00]

3 Press [3, 4] to change the setting.

You can also use the numbered buttons for setting.

4 Press [OK] when you have finished the settings.

The clock starts.

Software Update Search Now

Start the search for new software manually.

A new software version is announced by a message. Do not turn

your unit off during the update. This could result in the loss of

data. A message shows that the update has finished.

Note

If a TV station transmits a time setting signal, and when

“Automatic” in the Clock setting menu is set to “On”, the automatic

time correction function checks the time and if necessary it is

adjusted several times every day.

≥If applicable update data is found, press [2, 1] to select “Yes”

and press [OK].

∫ To change the region

Press [3, 4] to set “Automatic” to “On” and press [OK] in step

Initialize

≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.

Press [3, 4] to select the correct region and press [OK].

Auto clock setting starts. This takes a few minutes.

“Automatic clock setting completed.” screen is displayed.

Press [RETURN ] to exit the screen.

Shipping Condition^§1§2

All the settings except for the ratings level, ratings password, and

clock settings return to the factory preset.

[Yes]

[No]

Default Settings^§1§2

All the settings other than the tuning settings, clock settings,

region settings, disc language settings, ratings level, ratings

password, remote control code, return to the factory presets.

[Yes]

[No]

RQT9306

§1

The timer recording programmes are also cancelled.

Recordings on the HDD will not be deleted.

§2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Other Settings

2 Test by turning on the television and

changing channels.

Television operation

You can configure the remote control TV operation buttons to turn

the television on/off, change the television input mode, select the

television channel and change the television volume.

≥Repeat the procedure until you find the code that allows

correct operation.

≥If your television brand is not listed or if the code listed for

your television does not allow control of your television, this

remote control is not compatible with your television.

DRIVE

SELECT

Channel

Select

Note

VOL

Turn TV on/off

Input select

≥If your television brand has more than one code listed, select the

one that allows correct operation.

PAGE

Volume

2 3

4 5 6

8 9

Child Lock

The Child Lock deactivates all buttons on the unit and remote

control. Use it to prevent other people from operating the unit.

1 Point the remote control at the

Press and hold [OK] and

television

While pressing [Í TV], enter the code

with the numbered buttons.

[RETURN

simultaneously until “X

HOLD” appears on the unit’s display.

]

e.g.,

01:

[0] > [1]

10:

[1] > [0]

Manufacturer and Code No.

If you press a button while the Child Lock is on, “X HOLD” appears

on the unit’s display and operation is impossible.

Brand

Panasonic

AIWA

Code

01/02/03/04

Brand

Code

05/28

METZ

To cancel the Child Lock

Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN ] simultaneously until “X

HOLD” disappears.

MITSUBISHI

MIVAR

05/19/20/47

AKAI

27/30

BEJING

BEKO

NEC

05/71/72/73/ NOBLEX

BENQ

58/59

NOKIA

25/26/27/

60/61

NORDMENDE

OLEVIA

BRANDT

BUSH

10/15

ONWA

30/39/70

CENTREX

CHANGHONG

CURTIS

DAEWOO

DESMET

DUAL

ORION

PEONY

49/69

41/48/64

05/06/46

PHILCO

PHILIPS

PHONOLA

PIONEER

PROVIEW

PYE

64/65

37/38

ELEMIS

FERGUSON

FINLUX

FISHER

FUJITSU

FUNAI

10/34

RADIOLA

SABA

SALORA

SAMSUNG

63/67

32/42/43/

65/68

GOLDSTAR

GOODMANS

GRADIENTE

GRUNDIG

05/50/51

SANSUI

SANYO

SCHNEIDER

SEG

21/54/55/56

05/29/30

05/69/75/

76/77/78

HIKONA

HITACHI

SELECO

05/25

05/22/23/40/ SHARP

INNO HIT

IRRADIO

ITT

SIEMENS

SINUDYNE

SONY

JINGXING

TCL

31/33/66/

67/69

JVC

17/30/39/70

TELEFUNKEN

10/11/12/

13/14

KDS

TEVION

KOLIN

KONKA

TEX ONDA

THOMSON

TOSHIBA

10/15/44

16/57

05/50/51

07/46

LOEWE

WHITE

RQT9306

WESTINGHOUSE

MAG

YAMAHA

18/41

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Reference

Additional connections

Connecting a television with S VIDEO

terminals

Connecting a television with

COMPONENT VIDEO terminals

The S VIDEO OUT terminal achieves a more vivid picture than the

VIDEO OUT terminal. (Actual results depend on the television.)

≥Connect to terminals of the same colour.

≥Supplied Audio/Video cable can also be used as an alternative for

Audio cable without connecting the video connector (yellow).

Television’s rear panel

AUDIO IN

COMPONENT

VIDEO IN

Television’s rear panel

Component

video cable

AUDIO IN VIDEO S VIDEO

Audio

cable

S Video cable

AV1

(

)

Audio cable

OUT

OPTICAL

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COMPONENT

(PCM/BITSTREAM)

VIDEO OUT

R-AUDIO-L

VIDEO

S-VIDEO

(

)

AV2 EXT

This unit’s rear panel

COMPONENT VIDEO terminals can be used for either interlace or

progressive output (> 81) and provide a purer picture than the S

VIDEO OUT terminal.

≥Connect to terminals of the same colour.

≥Supplied Audio/Video cable can also be used as an alternative for

Audio cable without connecting the video connector (yellow).

R-AUDIO-L

VIDEO

S-VIDEO

Required setting

This unit’s rear panel

“Progressive” setting in the Setup menu (> 63)

If you have a regular television (CRT: cathode ray tube)

Progressive output may cause some flickering, even if it is

progressive compatible. Turn off “Progressive” if you are concerned

about it. This is the same for multi system televisions using PAL

mode.

CRT

DO NOT

COMPONENT

VIDEO OUT

COMPONENT

VIDEO IN

Progressive output

This unit

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Connecting an amplifier with a digital

input terminal

≥To enjoy multi-channel surround sound DVD-Video, connect an

amplifier with Dolby Digital, DTS and MPEG decoders.

Connecting a stereo amplifier

≥Connect to terminals of the same colour.

≥Supplied Audio/Video cable can also be used as an alternative for

Audio cable without connecting the video connector (yellow).

Required setting

“Digital Audio Output” in the Setup menu (> 62)

≥When this unit is connected to an amplifier with an optical digital

audio cable and connected to a television with an HDMI cable, you

can enjoy the highest quality of audio from the disc by setting

“Digital Audio Output” to “Optical Only” in the Setup menu (> 63).

In this case audio is only output from the amplifier not the

television.

Amplifier’s rear panel

AUDIO IN

≥Before purchasing an optical digital audio cable (not included),

check the terminal shape of the connected equipment.

≥You cannot use DTS Digital Surround decoders not suited to DVD.

Audio cable

Amplifier’s rear panel

OPTICAL IN

Insert fully, with

this side facing

up.

Optical digital audio cable

Do not bend sharply when

connecting.

R-AUDIO-L

VIDEO

S-VIDEO

AV1

(

)

This unit’s rear panel

OPTICAL

This unit’s rear panel

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COMPONENT

(PCM/BITSTREAM)

VIDEO OUT

(

)

AV2 EXT

Connecting with an HDMI compatible television and receiver

When connected to an HDMI compatible unit, an uncompressed digital audio and video signal is transmitted. You can enjoy high quality, digital

video and audio with just one cord. When connecting to an HDMI-compatible HDTV (High Definition Television), the output can be switched to

1080p, 1080i or 720p HD video.

≥Video sources converted to 1920k1080 resolution, while of high quality, will exhibit somewhat lower subjective image resolution than true,

native 1080p full-HD sources. See dealer for details.

≥Please use High Speed HDMI Cables that have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover).

≥When setting video output to “1080p”, please use the HDMI cables 5.0 meters or less.

Regarding VIERA Link “HDAVI Control^TM” function

When connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or a receiver equipped with the “HDAVI Control” function, linked operations would be possible.

[> 36, Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI Control^TM”)]

≥Non-HDMI-compliant cables cannot be utilised.

≥It is recommended that you use Panasonic’s HDMI cable.

Recommended part number:

RP-CDHG10 (1.0 m), RP-CDHG15 (1.5 m), RP-CDHG20 (2.0 m), RP-CDHG30 (3.0 m), RP-CDHG50 (5.0 m), etc.

Television’s rear panel

Required setting

≥Set “Digital Audio Output” to “HDMI and

Optical” (> 63).

(The default setting is “HDMI and Optical”.)

HDMI IN

HDMI cable

HDMI IN

HDMI OUT

Receiver’s rear panel

HDMI cable

HDMI AV OUT

AV1

(

)

OUT

OPTICAL

AC IN

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COMPONENT

(PCM/BIITSTREAM)

VIDEO OUT

AV OUT

R-AUDIO-L

VIDEO

S-VIDEO

(

)

AV2 EXT

This unit’s rear panel

Note

≥If you are connecting to a TV that is only compatible with 2 channel audio output, audio with 3 channels or more will be down mixed (> 81) and

output as 2 channels, even if connecting with an HDMI cable. (Some discs cannot be down mixed.)

≥You cannot connect this unit to DVI devices that are incompatible with HDCP.

For units compatible with HDCP (High-Bandwidth Digital Content Protection) copyright protection that are equipped with a digital DVI input

terminal (PC monitors, etc.):

RQT9306

Depending on the unit, images may not display properly or at all when connecting with a DVI/HDMI switching cable. (Audio cannot be output.)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Additional connections

Connecting a television and VCR

Connecting to a television with 21-pin Scart terminal

You can also connect with the AV1 terminal on this unit using the

21-pin Scart cable.

If your television is equipped with RGB input capability, by

connecting with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable you can see video

using RGB output on this unit.

Connect the unit directly to the television

If you connect the unit through an AV selector or

video cassette recorder to the television, video

signal will be affected by copyright protection

systems and the picture may not be shown

correctly.

DO NOT

Television

Required setting

“AV1 Output” in the Setup menu (> 63)

≥When connecting to a television with a

built-in VCR

VCR

Connect to the input terminals on the television

side if there are both television and VCR input

terminals.

Connecting to a VCR with 21-pin Scart terminal

You can also connect with the AV2 terminal on this unit using the

21-pin Scart cable.

This unit

Required setting

“AV2 Input” in the Setup menu (> 63)

Connecting an Analogue television and VCR

≥Connect to terminals of the same colour.

To household mains socket

(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)

To the aerial

Analogue television’s rear panel

AUDIO IN VIDEO IN

VHF/UHF

RF IN

Audio/Video cable

(included)

AC mains lead

(included)

Other connections

(> 8, 66)

Connect only after all other

connections are complete.

Aerial cable

Cooling fan

AV1

(

)

OUT

OPTICAL

AC IN

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COMPONENT

(PCM/BITSSTREAM)

VIDEO OUT

AV OUT

R-AUDIO-L

VIDEO

S-VIDEO

(

)

AV2 EXT

This unit’s rear panel

Audio/Video cable

RF coaxial cable

(included)

RF OUT

VHF/UHF

RF IN

VIDEO OUT

AUDIO OUT

VCR’s rear panel

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Connecting a Digital television and VCR

≥Connect to terminals of the same colour.

To the aerial

To household mains socket

(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)

Aerial cable

Digital television’s rear panel

AUDIO IN VIDEO IN

Splitter

VHF/UHF

RF IN

Aerial cable

AC mains lead

(included)

Connect only after all other

connections are complete.

Other connections

(> 8, 66)

Aerial cable

Audio/Video cable

(included)

Cooling fan

AV1

(

)

OUT

OPTICAL

AC IN

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COMPONENT

(PCM/BITSTREAM)

VIDEO OUT

AV OUT

R-AUDIO-L

VIDEO

S VIDEO

(

)

AV2 EXT

This unit’s rear panel

RF coaxial cable

(included)

Audio/Video cable

VHF/UHF

RF IN

VCR’s rear panel

VIDEO OUT

AUDIO OUT

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Frequently asked questions

Refer to the following items if you have any doubts about unit

operations.

Please tell me about CD-R and CD-RW

compatibility with this unit.

¾ This unit plays CD-R/CD-RW discs which have been recorded

in one of the following standards: CD-DA, Video CD, DivX,

MP3, WMA and still pictures (JPEG). (> 11, 12)

Set up

¾ You cannot write to a CD-R or CD-RW with this unit.

Which aerial is suitable for receiving digital

terrestrial broadcasts?

¾ You can use your current aerial. However, depending on the

area where you live, a new aerial may be necessary. Consult

your local TV aerial installer.

Recording

Can I record from a commercially purchased

video cassette or DVD?

Can this unit receive or record High Definition

(HD) broadcasts?

¾ No, this unit cannot receive or record High Definition (HD)

¾ Most commercially sold video cassettes and DVD are copy

protected; therefore, recording is usually not possible.

broadcasts.

Can DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video

format), +R, +R DL and +RW recorded on this unit

be played on other equipment?

¾ You can play on compatible equipment such as DVD players

after finalising the disc on this unit. However, depending on the

condition of the recording, the quality of the disc and

capabilities of the DVD player, play may not be possible.

¾ If you play a DVD-R DL, +R DL or +RW, use compatible

equipment.

What equipment is necessary to play multi

channel surround sound?

¾ You cannot playback multi-channel sound on this unit without

other equipment. You must connect this unit with an HDMI

cable or an optical digital cable to an amplifier with a

built-in (Dolby Digital, DTS or MPEG) decoder. (> 67)

Are the headphones and speakers directly

connected to the unit?

¾ You cannot directly connect them to the unit. Connect through

Can a digital audio signal from this unit be

recorded to other equipment?

¾ You can record if using the PCM signal. When recording DVD,

change the “Digital Audio Output” settings to the following in the

Setup menu. (> 62)

the amplifier etc. (> 67)

The television has both S VIDEO IN terminal and

COMPONENT VIDEO IN terminals. Which terminal

should I connect with?

¾ Connecting with the component video out terminal provides a

more vivid picture compared to connecting with the S Video out

terminal.

– PCM Down Conversion: On

– Dolby Digital/DTS/MPEG: PCM

However, only as long as digital recording from the disc is

permitted and the recording equipment is compatible with a

sampling frequency of 48 kHz.

¾ You cannot record MP3 or WMA signals.

If you have an LCD/plasma television or LCD projector

compatible with progressive scan, connect through the

component video terminals for high-quality progressive video.

If you have a CRT television or a multi system television using

PAL mode that is compatible with progressive scan, we cannot

recommend progressive output as some flickering can occur.

(> 8, 66)

(Analogue broadcast only)

Can I switch to bilingual broadcast during

recording?

¾ With HDD and DVD-RAM, you can. Just press [AUDIO].

(When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “Off”) (> 28)

¾ With DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +RW you

cannot. Change before recording with “Bilingual Audio

Selection” in the Setup menu. (> 62)

Is my television progressive output compatible?

¾ All Panasonic televisions that have 576 (625)/50i · 50p, 480

(525)/60i · 60p input terminals are compatible. Consult the

manufacturer if you have another brand of television.

Can I high speed copy to a disc?

¾ Yes, you can. (When “Rec for High Speed Copy” was set to

“On” before recording the programme.)

Disc

Depending on the disc type, the maximum speed varies. (> 45)

Can I play DVD-Video and Video CDs bought in

another country?

¾ You cannot play DVD-Video if their region number does not

include “4” or “ALL”.

Refer to the disc’s jacket for more information. (> Cover)

Can a DVD-Video that does not have a region

number be played?

¾ The DVD-Video region number indicates the disc conforms to a

standard. You cannot play discs that do not have a region

number. You also cannot play discs that do not conform to a

standard.

Please tell me about disc compatibility with this

unit.

¾ This unit records and plays DVD-RAM, DVD-R, DVD-RW

(DVD-Video format), +R, and +RW, and plays DVD-RW (DVD

Video Recording format). However you cannot directly record to

a DVD-R DL or +R DL disc on this unit (playback and copy are

possible). (> 10–11)

¾ This unit also records and plays high speed recording

compatible DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL, +RW

discs.

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TV Guide

USB

Is it possible to programme a recording, with a

start and end time that are different from the TV

Guide system?

¾ You can manually change the start and end time of

programmes in the Timer Recording menu. (> 23)

If setting timer recording using the TV Guide system, the start

recording time and finish recording time can be set to a margin

of up to 10 minutes. (> 61, Start Recording Time, Finish

Recording Time)

What can or cannot be done using the USB port

on this unit?

¾ You can play DivX, MP3, WMA or still picture (JPEG) files on a

USB memory. (> 30)

¾ You can copy still pictures (JPEG) files on a USB memory to the

HDD or DVD-RAM. (> 51)

¾ You can copy MP3 or WMA files on a USB memory to the HDD.

(> 52)

¾ You can connect a video equipment and copy SD Video to the

HDD or DVD-RAM. (> 49)

¾ Data on the HDD or a disc cannot be transferred to a USB

memory.

¾ Data on a USB memory cannot be edited or a USB memory

cannot be formatted on this unit.

Can I receive TV Guide system data via a

connected digital satellite receiver or a Set Top

Box?

¾ No, only via the built-in tuner. To perform timer recordings with

digital satellite receivers or Set Top Boxes, please use your

unit’s manual timer programming. (> 23)

¾ Some USB memories cannot be used with this unit. (> 11)

Music

How can I cancel a Timer programming?

What will happen if I try to record the same CD

multiple times?

¾ Press [PROG/CHECK] and select the desired entry and then

press [DELETE ¢]. (> 25)

¾ New album will be made following the existing album.

What happens when I unplug the unit from the

household mains socket?

¾ The TV Guide data will not be updated.

Can I transfer the music tracks from HDD to the

disc or USB memory?

¾ If the unit is disconnected from the household mains socket for

a longer period of time, the TV Guide data will be lost.

¾ Clock setting will be erased and timer recording will not work.

¾ No, you cannot.

TV Channels

Please tell me about TV reception channels.

¾ Channel indications are different from the actual TV channels.

Refer to the following list of TV Reception Channels.

List of TV Reception Channels

Tuner

System

Channel

Coverage

VHF

0–12

6–12

UHF

28–69

27–69

CATV

PAL–B

Australia

Analogue

Australia

Digital

45 MHz to

470 MHz

DVB–T

–

Language code list Enter the code with the numbered buttons.

Abkhazian:

Afar:

Afrikaans:

Albanian:

Amharic:

Arabic:

Armenian:

Assamese:

Aymara:

Azerbaijani:

Bashkir:

6566 Catalan:

6565 Chinese:

6570 Corsican:

8381 Croatian:

6577 Czech:

6582 Danish:

7289 Dutch:

6583 English:

6589 Esperanto:

6590 Estonian:

6665 Faroese:

6985 Fiji:

6765 Gujarati:

9072 Hausa:

6779 Hebrew:

7282 Hindi:

6783 Hungarian:

6865 Icelandic:

7876 Indonesian:

6978 Interlingua:

6979 Irish:

7185 Lingala:

7678 Rhaeto-Romance:

Tamil:

8465

7265 Lithuanian:

7387 Macedonian:

7273 Malagasy:

7285 Malay:

7383 Malayalam:

7378 Maltese:

7365 Maori:

7165 Marathi:

7384 Moldavian:

7465 Mongolian:

7487 Nauru:

7578 Nepali:

7583 Norwegian:

7575 Oriya:

7589 Pashto, Pushto: 8083 Spanish:

7579 Persian:

7585 Polish:

7684

8277 Tatar:

8279 Telugu:

8285 Thai:

8377 Tibetan:

8365 Tigrinya:

8484

8469

8472

6679

8473

8479

8482

8475

8487

8575

8582

8590

8673

8679

6789

8779

8872

7473

8979

9085

7775 Romanian:

7771 Russian:

7783 Samoan:

7776 Sanskrit:

7784 Scots Gaelic: 7168 Tonga:

7773 Serbian: 8382 Turkish:

7782 Serbo-Croatian: 8372 Turkmen:

6984 Italian:

7779 Shona:

7778 Sindhi:

7865 Singhalese:

7869 Slovak:

7879 Slovenian:

7982 Somali:

8378 Twi:

8368 Ukrainian:

8373 Urdu:

7079 Japanese:

7074 Javanese:

7073 Kannada:

7082 Kashmiri:

7089 Kazakh:

7176 Kirghiz:

7565 Korean:

6869 Kurdish:

6976 Laotian:

7576 Latin:

Basque:

Bengali; Bangla:

Finnish:

8375 Uzbek:

8376 Vietnamese:

8379 Volapük:

6983 Welsh:

8385 Wolof:

8387 Xhosa:

8386 Yiddish:

8476 Yoruba:

8471 Zulu:

6678 French:

6890 Frisian:

6672 Galician:

6682 Georgian:

6671 German:

7789 Greek:

Bhutani:

Bihari:

Breton:

7065 Sundanese:

8076 Swahili:

8084 Swedish:

8065 Tagalog:

8185 Tajik:

Bulgarian:

Burmese:

Byelorussian: 6669 Greenlandic:

Cambodian: 7577 Guarani:

7679 Portuguese:

7665 Punjabi:

7178 Latvian, Lettish: 7686 Quechua:

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Messages

On the television

Authorisation Error.

≥You are trying to play the DivX VOD content that was purchased with a different

registration code. You cannot play the content on this unit. (DivX) (> 31)

Cannot finish recording completely.

Copy-protect signal was detected.

≥The programme was copy-protected.

Disc is full, or maximum number of titles are

≥The HDD or disc may be full.

recorded. Cannot finish recording completely. ≥The maximum number of programme has been exceeded. (> 20)

≥[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW] Create space by deleting any unnecessary titles.

Cannot record.

Maximum number of titles exceeded.

[Even if you delete recorded content from the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL there is

no increase in disc space. Available space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +RW

increases only when the last recorded title is deleted.] (> 18, 39, 57)

≥Use a new disc.

Cannot playback.

≥You tried to play a title recorded using a different encoding system from that of the TV

system currently selected on the unit.

Alter the “TV System” setting on this unit to suit. (> 63)

TV system is different from the setting.

To playback, please change the TV System in

Setup.

Cannot play on this unit.

≥You tried to play a non-compatible image. (> 12)

No Disc

≥The disc may be upside down.

No folders.

≥There is no compatible folder in this unit. (> 12)

Not enough space in the copy destination.

≥Create space by deleting any unnecessary items. (> 18, 39, 43, 57)

≥Delete one or more items registered on the copy list to ensure that the “Destination

Capacity:” is not exceeded. (> 48, 51, 53)

This is a non-recordable disc.

Unable to format.

≥The disc may be dirty or scratched. (> 13)

≥The unit cannot record on the disc you inserted. Insert a DVD-RAM or unfinalised

DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R or +RW. (> 10)

≥You inserted an unformatted DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL or +RW. (> 57)

≥You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL disc on this unit. Record to the

HDD and then copy to the disc.

This disc is not formatted properly.

Format it using DVD Management

in FUNCTION MENU.

Not enough space on HDD. Space of 4 hours

( in SP mode ) is necessary.

≥[-R]DL] [+R]DL] It is not possible to copy when there is not enough free space on the HDD

or when the total number of the recorded titles on the HDD and the titles to be copied are

greater than 499.

Maximum number of titles is recorded on HDD.

Please delete unwanted titles.

Delete unwanted titles from the HDD. (> 18)

Rental Expired.

≥The DivX VOD content has zero remaining plays. You cannot play it. (DivX) (> 31)

≥The operation is prohibited by the unit or disc.

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

On the unit’s display

The following messages or service numbers appear on the unit’s display when something unusual is detected during startup and use.

DVD 

≥The remote control and main unit are using different codes. Change the code on the remote control.

(“∑” stands for a number.)

Press and hold [OK] and the indicated number button at the same time for more than 5

seconds. (> 64)

GUIDE

≥TV Guide data is being downloaded. (> 64)

HARD ERR^§

NoERAS

≥If there is no change after turning the unit on and off, consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.

≥You cannot delete items on this disc.

The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.

NoREAD

≥The disc is dirty or badly scratched. The unit cannot record, play, or edit. (> 13)

≥This message may appear when the DVD lens cleaner has finished cleaning.

Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit to eject the disc. (> 5)

NoWRIT

≥You cannot write to this disc.

The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.

PLEASE WAIT^§

≥There was a power failure or the AC plug was disconnected while the unit was on. The unit is carrying out its

recovery process. This process restores the unit to normal operation. The unit is not broken. Wait until the

message disappears.

PROG FULL^§

REMOVE

≥There are already 32 timer programmes. Delete unnecessary timer programmes. (> 25)

≥The USB device is drawing too much power. Remove the USB device.

SP 35:50

LP 151h

“SP”, “LP” and the

numbers are examples.

≥Available space on the HDD or disc.

The example “SP 35:50” is displayed when less than 100 hours are available and the example “LP 151h” is

displayed when over 100 hours are available.

“SP” and “LP” are recording modes, “35:50” means “35 hours 50 minutes” and “151h” means “151 hours”.

SW-DL

≥The unit is performing a software update. (> 64)

UNFORMAT^§

≥You inserted an unformatted DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, +RW, an unused +R, +R DL or DVD-RW (DVD-Video format)

that has been recorded on other equipment.

Format the disc to use it.

However all the recorded contents on the disc are deleted. (> 57)

UNSUPPORT^§

≥You have inserted a disc the unit cannot play or record on. (> 10–11)

≥You tried to operate with a non-compatible USB memory. (> 11)

F74

F75

U59

≥The HDMI connection could not be authenticated due to a transfer malfunction.

Consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.

≥The HDMI connection could not be authenticated due to an internal data malfunction.

Consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.

≥The unit is hot.

The unit switches to standby for safety reasons. Wait for about 30 minutes until the message disappears.

Select a position with good ventilation when installing the unit. Do not block the cooling fan on the rear of the unit.

U61

U76

≥(When a disc is not inserted) Displays when a malfunction has occurred during recording, playback or copy. This

is displayed when the unit is in the recovery process to return to normal operation; it is not broken. Once the

display clears you can use the unit again.

≥HDMI cannot be output because this unit is connected to a model that does not support copyright protection.

U80

U81

U99

≥The unit fails to operate properly. Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby mode.

Now press [Í/I] on the main unit again to turn the unit on.

U88

≥(When a disc is inserted) Displays when there was something unusual detected with the disc while recording,

playback or copy. This is displayed when the unit is in the recovery process to return to normal operation; it is not

broken. Once the display clears you can use the unit again. (> 74)

H or F

≥ There is something unusual. (The service number displayed after H and F depends on the unit’s condition.)

≥Check the unit using the troubleshooting guide. If the service number does not disappear, do the following.

(> 74–79)

1. Disconnect the plug from the household mains socket, wait a few seconds, then reconnect it.

2. Press [Í/I] to turn the power on. (The unit may be fixed.)

If the service number does not disappear despite after doing the above, request service from the dealer. Inform

the dealer of the service number when requesting service.

X HOLD

≥The Child Lock function is activated.

Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN ] at the same time until “X HOLD” disappears. (> 65)

The message are alternately displayed.

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Troubleshooting guide

Before requesting service, make the following checks. If you are in doubt about some of the check points, or if the solutions indicated in the chart

do not solve the problem, consult your dealer for instructions.

1 second. There will be a slight difference between the time

The following do not indicate a problem with this unit:

≥Regular disc rotating sounds.

≥Poor reception due to atmospheric conditions.

≥Image disturbance during search.

displayed and the actual elapsed time (e.g., actual 1 hour

elapsed time may display as approximately 59 minutes

56 seconds). This does not affect the recording.

≥

Interruptions in reception due to periodic satellite broadcasting breaks.

≥Operations are slow to respond when “Power Save” is set to “On”.

≥Operations do not work due to a poor-quality disc. (Try again

using a Panasonic disc.)

“U88” is displayed and the disc cannot be

ejected.

¾ The unit is carrying out the recovery process. Do the following

≥

The unit freezes due to one of its safety devices being activated.

(Press and hold [ /I] on the main unit for 10 seconds.)

to eject the disc.

Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby.

If the unit doesn’t switch to standby, press and hold [Í/I] on

the main unit for about 10 seconds. The unit is forcibly

switched to standby.

≥When the unit is turned on or off, there may be an unexpected

sound.

While the unit is off, press and hold [∫] and [CH W] on the

main unit at the same time for about 5 seconds. Remove the

disc.

Power

No power.

The unit does not turn on pressing [Í].

¾ Insert the AC mains lead securely into a known active

TV screen and video

household mains socket. (> 8, 68, 69)

Television reception worsens after connecting

the unit.

¾ This can occur because the signals are being divided between

the unit and other equipment. It can be solved by using a signal

booster, available from audio-visual suppliers. If it is not solved

by using a signal booster, consult the dealer.

The unit switches to standby mode.

¾ One of the unit’s safety devices is activated. Press [Í/I] on the

main unit to turn the unit on.

The power is turned off automatically.

¾ If you connected this unit to a “HDAVI Control” compatible TV

with an HDMI cable, this unit will be automatically set to

standby mode when the TV is set to standby mode. (> 36)

The digital channel information or control panel

does not appear.

¾ Select the length of time (3–10 sec.) in the “On-Screen

Messages” in the Setup menu. (> 62)

¾ The digital channel information will not appear during playback

or recording.

¾ Analogue broadcasts do not support the digital channel

information.

¾ The control panel is only displayed when connected to a TV

supporting “HDAVI Control 2” or later. (> 37)

This unit turns off when the TV input is switched.

¾ If connected with an HDAVI Control 4 compatible TV (VIERA)

with the “Intelligent Auto Standby” setting activated on the TV,

when switching the TV input, the unit will be automatically

turned to standby. For details please read the operating

instructions of the TV.

Teletext and teletext closed caption are not

displayed on the TV screen.

¾ This unit does not support teletext and teletext closed caption.

Displays

The display is dim.

¾ Change “FL Display” in the Setup menu. (> 62)

The grey background does not appear.

¾ Select “On” in “Grey Background” in the Setup menu. (> 62)

“0:00” is flashing on the unit’s display.

¾ Set the clock. (> 64)

Screen size is wrong.

¾ Use the television to change the aspect. If your television does

not have that function, set “Progressive” in the Picture menu to

“Off”. (> 54)

¾ Check the settings for “TV Aspect” in the Setup menu. (> 63)

¾ If you connect an HDMI cable, set “Aspect for 4:3 Video” to

“16:9” in the Setup menu. (> 63)

The time recorded on the disc and the available

time shown do not add up.

The displayed time of this unit is different from

the actual recording time or MP3/WMA recording

time.

The recorded title’s screen size is wrong.

¾ Set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On”, and set the “Aspect for

Recording” to “4:3”. (> 61)

¾ 16:9 aspect programmes are recorded in 4:3 aspect in the

following cases.

¾ Times shown may disagree with actual times.

¾ Available recording space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or

+RW increases only when the last recorded title is deleted. It

does not increase if other titles are deleted.

¾ Even if you delete recorded content from the DVD-R, DVD-R

DL, +R or +R DL, there is no increase in disc space.

¾ More disc space than the actual recording time is used after

recording or editing the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL 200

times or more.

– [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] If you recorded or copied using “EP” or “FR

(recordings 5 hours or longer)” recording mode.

– If you recorded or copied to a +R, +R DL or +RW.

– If you recorded with the “Aspect for Recording” set to “4:3” in

the Setup menu.

¾ While searching, the elapsed time may not display correctly.

When you want to record 16:9 programme in the same

aspect, set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On”, and set the

“Aspect for Recording” to “16:9”. (> 61)

The clock is not correct.

– By setting “Aspect for Recording” to “Automatic”, there is a

chance that the recording will be made using the wrong

aspect. Match the aspect settings to the broadcast when

recording. (> 61)

It may be possible to adjust the display mode on the TV. Refer to

your television’s operating instructions.

¾ Under adverse reception conditions, etc., the automatic time

correction function may not work. In this case, “Automatic” is

automatically turned to “Off”. If re-setting the Auto Clock Setting

does not work, set the time manually. (> 64)

Compared to the actual recorded time, the

elapsed time displayed is less.

(Only when recording in NTSC)

RQT9306

¾ The displayed recording/play time is converted from the

number of frames at 29.97 frames (equal to 0.999 seconds) to

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

¾ Depending on the connected equipment, the sound may be

distorted if this unit is connected with an HDMI cable.

¾ If recording to the HDD or a DVD-RAM when “Rec for High

Speed Copy” is set to “On”, you can only record either the main

or secondary audio of a bilingual broadcast.

Picture does not appear during timer recording.

¾ Timer recordings work regardless whether the unit is on or off.

To confirm the timer recording is going to work properly, turn the

unit on.

If you do not intend to copy the title to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL,

DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW set “Rec for

High Speed Copy” in the Setup menu to “Off”. (> 61)

The screen changes automatically.

¾ When “Screen Saver” in the Setup menu is set to “On”, the

display may turn to the screen saver mode automatically if

there is no operation for 5 minutes or more. (> 62) Press [OK]

to return to the previous screen.

Cannot switch audio.

¾ You cannot switch the audio in the following cases.

– When a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),

+R, +R DL or +RW disc is in the disc tray while DVD drive is

selected.

There is a lot of after-image when playing video.

¾ Set “Playback NR” in the Picture menu to “Off”. (> 54)

– When the recording mode is XP and “Audio Mode for XP

Recording” is set to “LPCM”. (> 62)

– When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”. (The default

setting is “On”). (> 61)

¾ The amplifier is connected using an optical digital cable or an

HDMI cable. You cannot switch the audio if “Dolby Digital” is set

to “Bitstream”. Set “Dolby Digital” to “PCM” or connect using

audio cables. (> 62, 67)

When playing DVD-Video using progressive

output, one part of the picture momentarily

appears to be doubled up.

¾ Set “Progressive” in the Picture menu to “Off”. This problem is

caused by the editing method or material used on DVD-Video,

but should be corrected if you use interlace output. (> 54)

¾ There are discs for which audio cannot be changed because of

how the disc was created.

There is no apparent change in picture quality

when adjusted with the Picture menu in the on-

screen menus.

Operation

¾ The effect is less perceivable with some types of video.

Cannot operate the television.

The remote control doesn’t work.

¾ Change the manufacturer code. Some televisions cannot be

operated even if you change the code. (> 65)

¾ The remote control and main unit are using different codes.

Change the code on the remote control. (> 64)

The images from this unit do not appear on the

television.

Picture is distorted.

¾ Make sure that the television is connected to the VIDEO OUT

terminal, S VIDEO OUT terminal, COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

terminals or HDMI terminal on this unit. (> 8, 66, 67, 68, 69)

¾ Make sure that the television’s input setting is correct.

¾ Progressive output is set to on but the connected television is

not progressive compatible. Press and hold [∫] and [1] (PLAY)

on the main unit at the same time for more than 5 seconds to

cancel this setting. The setting will change to interlace.

¾ The unit’s “TV System” setting differs from the TV system used

by the disc now playing. While stopped, keep pressing [∫] and

[< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit for 5 or more seconds. The

system switches from PAL to NTSC or vice versa. (> 63)

¾ When this unit is connected with an HDMI cable, use a disc that

matches with this unit’s TV system.

Press and hold [OK] and the indicated

number button at the same time for

more than 5 seconds.

¾ The batteries are depleted. Replace them with new ones. (> 4)

¾ You are not pointing the remote control at the main unit’s

remote control signal sensor during operation. (> 4)

¾ Coloured glass may obstruct the signal reception/transmission.

¾ Don’t place the signal sensor in direct sunlight or in areas that

may be subject to sunlight exposure.

¾ It may be necessary to set the code on the remote control again

after changing the batteries. (> 64)

¾ It may be necessary to set the manufacturer code again after

changing the batteries. (> 65)

¾ The child lock function is activated. (> 65)

¾ Picture may not be seen when more than 4 devices are

connected with HDMI cables.

Reduce the number of connected devices.

The unit is on but cannot be operated.

¾ Recording drive or playback drive has not been selected

properly. (> 15, 16)

¾ Some operations may be prohibited by the disc.

¾ The unit is hot (“U59” appears on the display). Wait for “U59” to

disappear.

The picture is distorted during play, or video will

not play correctly.

¾ You may be playing a TV programme recorded with poor

reception or unfavourable weather conditions.

¾ The picture may be distorted or a black screen may appear

briefly between recorded titles in the following situations:

– between titles recorded with different recording modes.

– between scenes recorded with different aspect ratios.

– between scenes recorded with different resolutions.

– between playlist chapters.

¾ One of the unit’s safety devices may have been activated.

Reset the unit as follows:

Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby.

If the unit doesn’t switch to standby, press and hold [Í/I] on

the main unit for about 10 seconds. The unit is forcibly

switched to standby.

Alternatively, disconnect the AC mains lead, wait one

minute, then reconnect it.

Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch it on. If the unit still

cannot be operated, consult the dealer.

Sound

No sound.

Low volume.

Cannot eject disc.

¾ The unit is recording.

¾ The unit may have a problem. While the unit is off, press and

hold [∫] and [CH W] on the main unit at the same time for about

5 seconds. Remove the disc and consult the dealer.

If the Child Lock function is activated, above operation does not

work. Cancel the Child Lock function. (> 65)

Distorted sound.

Cannot hear the desired audio type.

¾ Check the connections and the “Digital Audio Output” settings.

Check the input mode on the amplifier if you have connected

one. (> 8, 62, 63, 66, 67, 68, 69)

¾ Press [AUDIO] to select the audio. (> 28)

¾ Audio may not be output due to how files were created. (DivX)

¾ Audio may not be heard when more than 4 devices are

connected with HDMI cables.

Reduce the number of connected devices.

¾ The sound effects will not work when the bitstream signal is

output from the HDMI AV OUT terminal or the OPTICAL

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal.

¾ To output audio from a device connected with an HDMI cable,

set “Digital Audio Output” to “HDMI and Optical” in the Setup

menu. (> 63)

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Troubleshooting guide

Cannot tune channels.

Cannot download channel presets from the

television.

Timer recording does not stop even when [∫] is

pressed.

¾ Check the connections. (> 8, 68, 69)

¾ You must connect to a VIERA Link (HDAVI Control 3 or later)

compatible TV with a HDMI cable to download channel presets.

¾ If you start recording immediately after turning on the unit while

“Power Save” is set to “Off” in the Setup menu (Quick Start

mode), you cannot then stop recording for a few seconds.

Startup is slow.

The timer programme remains even after

recording finishes.

¾ The timer programme remains if set to daily or weekly.

¾ Set “Power Save” to “Off” in the Setup menu. (> 64)

If connected with an HDAVI Control 4 compatible TV (VIERA)

with the “Standby Power Save” setting activated on the TV,

even with “Power Save” set to “Off”, when the TV is in Standby

mode, the unit may take some time to startup.

¾ Startup takes time in the following situations:

– A disc other than a DVD-RAM is inserted.

– The clock is not set.

A part or whole of a recorded title has been lost.

¾ If there is a power failure or the plug is disconnected from the

household mains socket while recording or editing, the title may

be lost or the HDD/disc may become unusable.

– Immediately after a power failure or the AC mains lead is

connected.

– When the unit is connected with an HDMI cable.

You will have to format the disc ([HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW]) or

use a new disc. We cannot offer any guarantee regarding lost

programmes or discs. (> 57)

Recording, timer recording and

copying

The programme name and the recorded title do

not match.

¾ There was a programme change after timer recording was set

but the recorded title still has the old programme name.

Cannot record.

Cannot copy.

¾ You haven’t inserted a disc or the disc you inserted cannot be

recorded on. Insert a disc the unit can record onto. (> 10)

¾ The disc is unformatted. Format the disc. [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R]

[+R]DL] [+RW] (> 57)

¾ The write-protect tab on the cartridge is set to PROTECT, or the

disc is protected with DVD Management. (> 56)

¾ Some programmes have limitations on the number of times

they can be recorded (CPRM). (> 81)

¾ You cannot record when there is not enough space or when the

number of titles has reached its limit. Delete unwanted titles or

use a new disc. (> 18, 39, 57)

¾ You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL or +R DL disc on this

unit.

Cannot copy to a DVD-R, etc. disc using the high

speed mode.

¾ When recording to the HDD, set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to

“On” in the Setup menu. (The default setting is “On”). (> 61)

¾ In the following cases, high speed mode does not work, even if

the titles were recorded with “Rec for High Speed Copy” set to

“On”.

– [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] If recorded in “EP” or “FR (recordings

5 hours or longer)” mode.

– [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] If recorded in 16:9 aspect.

– [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] If recorded in 16:9 aspect using “EP” mode

or “FR” (recordings 5 hours or longer) mode.

¾ [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded on other Panasonic DVD

recorders with “Rec for High Speed Copy” set to “On”, and then

copied to the HDD on this unit may not copy to +R, +R DL or

+RW discs with high-speed copy.

Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.

¾ [-R]DL] [+R]DL] In the following situations, you cannot copy.

Delete unnecessary titles from the HDD and then copy. (> 18,

39, 57)

– If there is not enough space available on the HDD (If you will

copy titles from the HDD to a blank disc and fill the entire

disc, HDD disc space equivalent to 4 hours of SP mode

recording is necessary).

When copying, it takes a long time even when

high speed mode is selected.

– If the number of recorded titles and the number of titles to be

copied has exceeded 499.

¾ Use a disc that is compatible with high speed recording. Even if

the disc is high speed recording compatible, the maximum

speed may not be possible due to the condition of the disc.

¾ It takes longer than normal to copy many titles.

¾ You cannot high speed copy to DVD-R titles longer than 6 hours

when using other Panasonic DVD Recorders that are not

compatible with EP ( 8Hours ) mode recording.

¾ You cannot record and copy on finalised discs. However, you

can record and copy again if you format DVD-RW.

¾ Due to peculiarities of DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-

Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW you may be unable to

record onto them if you either insert and remove the disc or

switch the unit on and off while a disc is loaded, a total of fifty

times.

¾ DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL

and +RW recorded on this unit may not be recordable on other

Panasonic DVD Recorders.

¾ This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have

PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes

can be recorded onto the HDD.) Play of discs recorded with

both PAL and NTSC on another unit is not guaranteed.

¾ Some broadcasts are copyright protected.

An unusually loud sound is coming from the

rotating DVD-R, etc.

¾ When recording or high speed copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL,

DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW the sound

of the disc rotating may be louder than normal, however, this is

not a problem.

The DV automatic recording function does not

work.

Cannot record from external equipment.

¾ If images cannot be recorded or if the recording is aborted,

check the connections and DV equipment settings. (> 22)

¾ You cannot start recording until the images from the DV

equipment appear on the television.

¾ Check that the connection is correct. (> 22, 68, 69)

¾ Select the input channel for the equipment you have connected.

¾ Recording may not be performed as desired if the time codes

on the tape in the DV equipment are not successive.

¾ Depending on the equipment, the DV automatic recording may

not operate properly.

¾ The audio/video recordings are recorded on other than a DV

tape. (> 22)

Timer recording does not work properly.

¾ The timer programme is incorrect or different timer programme

times overlap. Correct the programme. (> 25)

¾ The programme is not in timer recording standby. (The timer

icon “F” in the timer recording list is not on.) (> 24)

¾ Set the clock. (> 64)

¾ The programme information in the TV Guide system may not be

correct. It is recommended to modify the start and end times to

allow a margin of a few minutes. (> 23)

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Play

The Video CD picture does not display properly.

¾ When connecting to Multi-system TV, select “NTSC” in “TV

System” in the Setup menu. (> 63)

¾ When connecting to PAL TV, the lower part of the picture

cannot be displayed correctly during search.

Play fails to start even when [1] (PLAY) is

pressed.

Play starts but then stops immediately.

¾ Insert the disc correctly with the label facing up. (> 13)

¾ The disc is dirty. (> 13)

¾ You tried to play a blank disc or disc unplayable on this unit.

(> 10–11)

¾ You tried to play a +RW that needs to be finalised on the

equipment used for recording.

Time Slip, Manual Skip, etc. does not work.

¾ These functions do not work with finalised discs.

¾ Time Slip does not work when the unit’s “TV System” settings

are different from the title recorded on the disc. (> 63)

¾ You may be able to copy a “One time only recording” title that

was recorded to DVD-RAM using a different Panasonic DVD

Recorder to this unit’s HDD, but play is not possible due to

It takes time before play starts.

¾ This is normal on DivX video. (DivX)

¾ When recording to DVD-RAM using “EP ( 8Hours )” mode, play

may not be possible on DVD players that are compatible with

DVD-RAM. In this case use “EP ( 6Hours )” mode. (> 61)

¾ You cannot play discs during DV automatic recording.

¾ If playing DivX VOD content, refer to the homepage where you

purchased it. (DivX) (> 31)

Picture stops.

¾ Picture may stop if the DivX files are greater than 2 GB. (DivX)

¾ Make sure that the TV is turned on. If the menu or messages

are displayed, follow the on-screen instructions.

Cannot see the beginning of the title played.

¾ (If connecting to a TV that supports VIERA Link with an HDMI

cable)

When [1] (PLAY) is pressed on this unit’s remote control, you

may not be able to see the beginning of the title played until the

picture is displayed on the TV. Using [:], return to the

beginning of the title.

Audio and video momentarily pause.

¾ This occurs between playlist chapters.

¾ This occurs between chapters and with partially deleted titles

on finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),

+R, +R DL and +RW that have been copied using the high

speed mode.

¾ This occurs as scenes change during Quick View.

¾ [-R]DL] [+R]DL] When playing a title recorded on both layers, the

unit automatically switches between layers and plays the title in

the same way as a normal programme. However, video and

audio may momentarily cut out when the unit is switching

layers. (> 10)

Edit

Available disc space does not increase even after

deleting a title.

¾ Available disc space does not increase after deleting on DVD-

R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL. (> 18)

¾ Disc space increases only when the last recorded title is

deleted on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +RW. The disc

space does not increase when any other titles are deleted.

DVD-Video is not played.

¾ You have set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play. Change

this setting. (> 61)

¾ Ensure disc is for the correct DVD-Video region number, and is

not defective. (> Cover)

Cannot edit.

¾ You may not be able to edit on the HDD if there is no available

space.

Alternative soundtrack and subtitles cannot be

selected.

Delete any unwanted titles to create empty space. (> 18)

¾ The languages are not recorded on the disc.

¾ You may not be able to use the on-screen menus to change the

soundtrack and subtitles on some discs. Use the disc’s menus

to make changes. (> 15)

Cannot format.

¾ The disc is dirty. Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.

(> 13)

¾ You tried formatting a disc that you may not be able to use in

this unit. (> 10–11)

No subtitles.

¾ Subtitles are not recorded on the disc.

¾ Turn the subtitles on and select “Text” or the subtitle number.

(> 54)

Cannot create chapters.

Cannot mark the start point or the end point

during “Partial Delete” operation.

¾ The unit writes the chapter division information to the disc when

you turn it off or remove the disc. The information is not written

if there is an interruption to the power before this.

¾ These operations are not possible with still pictures.

¾ You cannot set points if they are too close to each other. You

cannot set an end point before a start point.

Angle cannot be changed.

¾ Angles can only be changed during scenes where different

angles are recorded.

You have forgotten your ratings password.

You want to cancel the ratings level.

¾ The ratings level returns to the factory preset. While the disc

tray is open, press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive,

then press and hold [¥ REC] and [1] (PLAY) on the main unit

at the same time for 5 or more seconds (“INIT” will appear on

the unit’s display).

Cannot delete chapters.

¾ When the chapter is too short to delete, use “Combine

Chapters” to make the chapter longer. (> 39)

Cannot create a playlist.

¾ You cannot select all the chapters at once in a title if the title

Quick View does not work.

also includes still pictures. Select them individually.

¾ This does not work when audio is other than Dolby Digital.

¾ This does not work when recording is in XP or FR mode.

The resume play function does not work.

¾ Memorized positions are cancelled when

– press [∫] several times.

– open the disc tray.

– [CD] [VCD] [USB] turn off the unit.

– if a recording or timer recording was executed.

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Troubleshooting guide

Music

TV Guide

Tracks could not be copied to the HDD.

The TV Guide System does not receive any data.

¾ If there are copyright protected tracks such as SCMS

restrictions, they will not be copied.

¾ Recording from CDs that do not conform to CD-DA

specifications (copy control CDs, etc.) cannot be guaranteed.

¾ Bonus tracks may not be copied.

¾ Check whether the clock is properly set. (> 64)

¾ If signal quality is bad (ghost images or limited reception), the

TV Guide system may not be able to receive any data.

“No Data” is displayed for some or all stations.

¾ Some stations are not supported by the TV Guide system.

¾ Analogue broadcasts are not supported by the TV Guide

ID3 tag of a MP3 file or WMA tag of a WMA file is

not completely displayed.

¾ Only the track name ([HDD] [USB]) and artist name ([HDD]) can

system.

¾ Programme the Timer recording manually or via G-CODE.

be displayed with this unit.

(> 23)

The TV Guide information is not displayed

properly.

Still pictures

¾ There was a programme change.

Cannot display DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen.

¾ This screen cannot be displayed during recording or copying.

Check the current programme, e.g. on the Web site for the TV

Guide system provider or station provider.

¾ Programme information about analogue broadcasts is not

displayed.

Still pictures (JPEG) do not playback normally.

¾ The images that were edited on the PC, such as Progressive

The TV Guide data transfer was interrupted.

JPEG etc., may not playback. (> 12)

¾ The TV Guide system shows the data that was received up to

the interruption.

¾ The programme information may be incomplete.

USB

The TV Guide data is not updated.

¾ Make sure that the time is set correctly.

¾ Check whether “Off” is set under “TV Guide Download in

Standby” and change the setting in the Setup menu. (> 64)

The contents of the USB memory cannot be read.

¾ Remove the USB memory from the USB port and then insert

again. If this does not solve the problem, turn off and turn on the

unit again.

¾ Check that the USB memory is inserted correctly. (> 13)

¾ The format of the USB memory or of its contents is not

compatible with the unit. (The contents on the USB memory

may be damaged.) (> 11, 12)

¾ The USB memory contains a folder structure and/or file

extensions that are not compatible with this unit. (> 12)

¾ Turn off and then turn on the unit again.

¾ USB memories connected using a USB extension cable or a

USB hub may not be recognized by this unit.

¾ Some USB memories cannot be used with this unit. (> 11)

¾ If inserted during playback, recording or copying etc., the USB

memory may not be recognized by this unit.

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The operation on this unit (music playback etc.)

is interrupted.

¾ The operation on this unit may be interrupted when you press

buttons on the TV remote control that do not work for VIERA

Link functions.

Digital broadcast

Digital broadcasts cannot be received.

¾ Digital broadcast may not have started in your region yet.

¾ The aerial may not be pointing in the direction of the TV station,

or the direction of the aerial may have changed due to strong

winds or vibration. If problem persists consult your local TV

aerial installer.

To reset this unit

To return all the settings other than the main ones

to the factory preset

¾ Select “Yes” in “Shipping Condition” in the Setup menu. All the

settings except for the ratings level, ratings password and clock

settings return to the factory preset. The timer recording

programmes are also cancelled. (> 64)

¾ Select “Yes” in “Default Settings” in the Setup menu. All the

settings other than the tuning settings, clock settings, region

settings, disc language settings, ratings level, ratings password,

remote control code, return to the factory presets. The timer

recording programmes are also cancelled. (> 64)

¾ Press and hold [X CH] and [CH W] on the main unit until the

Auto-Setup screen appears. All the settings except for the

ratings level, ratings password, clock settings and remote

control code return to the factory preset. The timer recording

programmes are also cancelled.

After DVB Auto Setup only some or no DVB

channels are found.

¾ Check to ensure your area is covered by DVB transmissions.

¾ Check that the aerial and antenna cable are designed for DVB.

For your safety, the aerial and cable should be inspected/

installed by a licenced installer that should comply with

Australian Standard AS1417.1.

If you live within 5-10 km of DVB transmission towers, a

combined VHF/UHF aerial should be adequate. Outside this

area, separate VHF and UHF aerials provide superior reception

performance. (> 8)

¾ If you live in a unit or apartment, check to ensure the Master

Antenna TV (MATV) system is designed for analogue and DVB-

T reception. Please consult your body corporate.

To reset the ratings level settings

¾ While the disc tray is open, press [DRIVE SELECT] to select

the DVD drive, then press and hold [¥ REC] and [1] (PLAY) on

the main unit at the same time for 5 or more seconds.

Picture regularly breaks up on some channels.

“No Signal” message is displayed.

¾ Check “Signal Condition”. If “Signal Quality” or “Signal Strength”

are displayed in red or constantly changing, check aerial. If

problem persists consult your local TV aerial installer. (> 60)

¾ Check that the aerial and antenna cable are designed for DVB.

For your safety, the aerial and cable should be inspected/

installed by a licenced installer that should comply with

Australian Standard AS1417.1. (> 8)

¾ Interference (known as impulse noise) from household

appliances such as light switches, fridges etc. may cause

picture break up and/or audio distortion. Use a high quality

quad shielded coaxial cable fly lead between this unit and

antenna wall socket to minimise impulse noise pickup. If

problem persists consult your local TV aerial installer.

¾ Check aerial connection.

To restore the unit if it freezes due to one of the

safety devices being activated

¾ Press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for 10 seconds. (The

settings remain.)

Other

After performing an update, you can no longer

receive broadcasts.

¾ Depending on the content of the update, some settings may

¾ Adjust the aerial reception with “DVB Manual Tuning” in the

Setup menu. (> 59)

have returned to the preset values. Fix the settings again.

Picture very infrequently breaks up on some or

all channels.

¾ Electrical atmospheric interference caused by local or distant

lighting storms or heavy rain with wind in “leafy” locations may

cause pictures to break up and audio to mute or distort

momentarily.

¾ Impulse noise interference from an infrequently used electrical

appliance, or a passing vehicle or lawn mower with a “noisy”

ignition system.

VIERA Link

VIERA Link doesn’t work.

¾ Check the HDMI cable connection. Check that “HDMI” is

displayed on the front display when the power for the main unit

is set to On.

¾ Make sure that “VIERA Link” is set to “On”. (> 63)

¾ Check the “HDAVI Control” settings on the connected device.

¾ Some functions may not work if depending on the version of

“HDAVI Control” of the connected equipment. This unit supports

“HDAVI Control 4” functions.

¾ If the connection for the equipment connected with HDMI was

changed, or if there was a power failure or the plug was

removed from the household mains socket, “HDAVI Control”

may not work.

In this case, perform the following operations.

When the HDMI cable is connected to all equipment with the

power on, turn the TV (VIERA) on again.

Change the TV (VIERA) settings for the “HDAVI Control”

function to off, and then set to on again. (For more

information, see the VIERA operating instructions.)

Switch the VIERA input to HDMI connection with this unit,

and after this unit’s screen is displayed check that “HDAVI

Control” is working.

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Specifications

Recording system

DVD-RAM : DVD Video Recording format

DVD-R : DVD-Video format

DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) : DVD-Video format

Video

Video system:

PAL colour signal, 625 lines, 50 fields

NTSC colour signal, 525 lines, 60 fields

MPEG2 (Hybrid VBR)

DVD-RW : DVD-Video format

+R DL (Double Layer)

+RW

Recording system:

Video in (PAL/NTSC):

AV1/AV2 (21 pin), AV3/AV4 (pin jack) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination

S-Video in (PAL/NTSC):

Recordable discs

DVD-RAM:

AV2 (21 pin), AV3/AV4 (S terminal) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination

Video out (PAL/NTSC):

AV1/AV2 (21 pin), Video Out (pin jack) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination

S-Video out (PAL/NTSC):

AV1 (21 pin), S-Video Out (S terminal) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination

RGB out (PAL/NTSC):

2X SPEED (Ver. 2.0),

2-3X SPEED (Ver. 2.1), 2-5X SPEED (Ver. 2.2)

1X SPEED (Ver. 2.0), 1-4X SPEED (Ver. 2.0),

1-8X SPEED (Ver. 2.0), 1-16X SPEED (Ver. 2.1)

DVD-R:

DVD-R DL (Dual Layer): 2-4X SPEED (Ver. 3.0), 2-8X SPEED (Ver. 3.0)

DVD-RW:

1X SPEED (Ver. 1.1), 1-2X SPEED (Ver. 1.1),

2-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.2), 2-6X SPEED (Ver. 1.2)

2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.0), 2.4-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.1),

2.4-8X SPEED (Ver. 1.2), 2.4-16X SPEED (Ver. 1.3)

2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.0), 2.4-8X SPEED (Ver. 1.1)

2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.1), 2.4-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.2)

AV1 (21 pin) 0.7 Vp-p (PAL) 75 ≠, termination

+R:

Component video output (NTSC 480p/480i, PAL 576p/576i)

Y: 1.0 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination

+R DL:

+RW:

P^B: 0.7 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination

P^R: 0.7 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination

Television system

Recording time

Maximum 8 hours (using 4.7 GB disc)

XP: Approx. 1 hour, SP: Approx. 2 hours

LP: Approx. 4 hours, EP: Approx. 6 hours/8 hours

Tuner system

PAL–B

Australia

Channel coverage

VHF: 0 to 12

UHF: 28 to 69

Maximum Approx. 441 hours with 250 GB HDD (EP 8 hours mode)

XP: Approx. 55 hours, SP: Approx. 110 hours

CATV: 45 MHz to 470 MHz

LP: Approx. 221 hours, EP: Approx. 331 hours/441 hours

DVB–T

Australia

VHF: 6 to 12

UHF: 27 to 69

Playable discs

DVD-RAM : DVD Video Recording format

DVD-R : DVD-Video format, MP3^§1, WMA^§1, JPEG^§1, DivX^§1

DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) : DVD-Video format,

MP3^§1, WMA^§1, JPEG^§1, DivX^§1

DVD-RW : DVD-Video format, DVD Video Recording format

+R, +R DL (Double Layer), +RW

RF converter output:

Not provided

DV input

IEEE 1394 Standard, 4 pin : 1 pc

USB port

USB standard:

Format:

Type A : 1 pc

USB 2.0 High Speed

FAT16, FAT32

DVD-Video, CD-Audio (CD-DA), Video CD

Video (SD Video)^§2

Codec:

File Format:

CD-R/CD-RW : CD-DA^§1, Video CD^§1, MP3^§1, WMA^§

MPEG2 (SD-Video Entertainment Video Profile)

SD-Video format conforming

JPEG^§¹, DivX^§

Others

Region code:

Internal HDD capacity

Optical pick-up

250 GB

‚ 4

Operating temperature:

Operating humidity range:

Power supply:

Power consumption:

Dimensions (WkHkD):

Mass:

5 oC to 40 oC

10 % to 80 % RH (no condensation)

AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz

Approx. 36 W

System with 1 lens, 2 integration units

(662 nm wavelength for DVDs, 780 nm wavelength for CDs)

LASER specification

Class 1 LASER Product (Pickup)

Wave length:

430 mmk59 mmk326 mm

Approx. 4.2 kg

780 nm wave length

662 nm wave length

Power consumption in standby mode:

Approx. 2 W (“Power Save” is set to “On”)

Approx. 15 W (“Power Save” is set to “Off”)

DVD

Laser power:

No hazardous radiation is emitted with the safety protection

Note

Audio

Recording system:

Audio in:

Input level:

Input impedance:

Audio out:

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Dolby Digital 2ch, Linear PCM (XP mode)

AV1/AV2 (21 pin), AV3/AV4 (pin jack)

Standard: 0.5 Vrms, Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz

More than 10 k≠

AV1/AV2 (21 pin), Audio Out (pin jack)

Standard: 0.5 Vrms, Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz

Less than 1 k≠

^§1Finalising is necessary for compatible playback.

^§2Video Recording conversion and transfer is possible from USB to

HDD or DVD-RAM disc.

After Video Recording conversion and transfer to HDD or DVD-

RAM disc, the playback is possible.

Output level:

Output impedance:

Digital audio out: Optical terminal (PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG)

HDMI Output

19 pin type A: 1 pc

HDMI^TM(V.1.3a with Deep Colour)

≥This unit supports “HDAVI Control 4” function.

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Glossary

Bitstream

Formatting

This is the digital form of multi-channel audio data (e.g., 5.1 channel)

before it is decoded into its various channels.

Formatting is the process of making media such as DVD-RAM

recordable on recording equipment.

You can format DVD-RAM, DVD-RW (only as DVD-Video format),

+RW and the HDD or unused +R and +R DL on this unit.

Formatting permanently deletes all contents.

CPRM (Content Protection for Recordable Media)

CPRM is technology used to protect broadcasts that are allowed to

be recorded only once. Such broadcasts can be recorded only with

CPRM compatible recorders and discs.

Frames and fields

Frames refer to the single images that constitute the video you see

on your television. Each frame consists of two fields.

Decoder

A decoder restores the coded audio signals on DVDs to normal. This

is called decoding.

Deep Colour

This unit incorporates HDMI^TM(V.1.3a with Deep Colour) technology

that can reproduce greater colour gradation (4096 steps) when

connected to a compatible TV. You can enjoy exceptionally rich,

natural-looking colours, with smooth, detailed gradation and minimal

colour banding. [A lower colour gradation (256 steps), without Deep

Colour, will be reproduced if connected to a TV which does not

support Deep Colour. The unit will automatically set appropriate

output to suit the connected TV.]

Frame

Field

≥A frame still shows two fields, so there may be some blurring, but

picture quality is generally better.

≥A field still shows less picture information so it may be rougher, but

there is no blurring.

HDD (Hard disk drive)

DivX

This is a mass data storage device used in computers, etc. A disk

with a surface that has been treated with magnetic fluid is spun and

a magnetic head is brought in close proximity to facilitate the reading

and writing of large amounts of data at high speed.

DivX is a popular media technology created by DivX, Inc. DivX

media files contain highly compressed video with high visual quality

that maintains a relatively small file size.

Dolby Digital

This is a method of coding digital signals developed by Dolby

Laboratories. Apart from stereo (2-channel) audio, these signals can

also be multi-channel audio. A large amount of audio information

can be recorded on one disc using this method.

When recording on this unit Dolby Digital (2 channel) is the default

audio.

HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)

Unlike conventional connections, it transmits uncompressed digital

video and audio signals on a single cable. This unit supports high-

definition video output [720p (750p), 1080i (1125i), 1080p (1125p)]

from HDMI AV OUT terminals. To enjoy high-definition video a high

definition compatible television is required.

Down-mixing

JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group)

This is the process of remixing the multi-channel audio found on

some discs into two channels. It is useful when you want to listen to

the 5.1-channel audio recorded on DVDs through your television’s

speakers. Some discs prohibit down-mixing and this unit can then

only output the front two channels.

This is a system used for compressing/decoding colour still pictures.

If you select JPEG as the storage system on digital cameras, etc.,

the data will be compressed to 1/10–1/100 of its original size. The

benefit of JPEG is less deterioration in picture quality considering

the degree of compression.

Drive

LPCM (Linear PCM)

These are uncompressed digital signals, similar to those found on

CDs.

In the instance of this unit, this refers to the hard disk (HDD) and disc

(DVD). These perform the reading and writing of data.

DTS (Digital Theater Systems)

MPEG2 (Moving Picture Experts Group)

This surround system is used in many movie theaters. There is good

separation between the channels, so realistic sound effects are

possible.

A standard for efficiently compressing and expanding colour video.

MPEG2 is a compression standard used for DVD and satellite based

digital broadcasting. This unit records programmes using MPEG2.

SD Video files shot with a Panasonic SD video camera, etc. can be

copied to the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc.

Dynamic range

Dynamic range is the difference between the lowest level of sound

that can be heard above the noise of the equipment and the highest

level of sound before distortion occurs.

Dynamic range compression means reducing the gap between the

loudest and softest sounds. This means you can listen at low

volumes but still hear dialogue clearly.

MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3)

An audio compression method that compresses audio to

approximately one tenth of its size without any considerable loss of

audio quality.

Pan&Scan/Letterbox

Film and video

In general, DVD-Video are produced with the intention that they be

viewed on a widescreen television (16:9 aspect ratio), so images

often don’t fit regular (4:3 aspect ratio) televisions. Two styles of

picture, “Pan & Scan” and “Letterbox”, deal with this problem.

DVD-Videos are recorded using either film or video. This unit can

determine which type has been used, then uses the most suitable

method of progressive output.

Film:

Recorded at 25 frames per second (PAL discs) or 24

frames per second (NTSC discs). (NTSC discs

recorded at 30 frames per second as well.)

Generally appropriate for motion picture films.

Recorded at 25 frames/50 fields per second. (PAL

discs) or 30 frames/60 fields per second (NTSC discs).

Generally appropriate for TV drama programmes or

animation.

Pan & Scan: The sides are cut off so the picture

fills the screen.

Video:

Letterbox:

Black bands appear at the top and

bottom of the picture so the picture

itself appears in an aspect ratio of

16:9.

Finalise

A process that makes play of a recorded CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R,

etc. possible on equipment that can play such media. You can

finalise DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R

DL on this unit.

Playback control (PBC)

If a Video CD has playback control, you can select scenes and

information with menus.

(This unit is compatible with version 2.0 and 1.1.)

After finalising, the disc becomes play-only and you can no longer

record or edit. However, finalised DVD-RW can be formatted for

recording again.

Progressive/Interlace

The PAL video signal standard has 576 (or 625) interlaced (i) scan

lines, whereas progressive scanning, called 576p (or 625p), uses

twice the number of scan lines. For the NTSC standard, these are

called 480i (or 525i) and 480p (or 525p) respectively.

Using progressive output, you can enjoy the high-resolution video

recorded on media such as DVD-Video.

Folder

This is a place on the hard disk or disc where groups of data are

stored together. In the case of this unit, it refers to the place where

still pictures (JPEG) and MPEG2 are stored.

Your television must be compatible to enjoy progressive video.

Panasonic televisions with 576 (625)/50i · 50p, 480 (525)/60i · 60p

input terminals are progressive compatible.

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Glossary

Gracenote^®Corporate Description

Protection

You can prevent accidental deletion by setting writing protection or

deletion protection.

Music recognition technology and related data are provided by

Gracenote^®. Gracenote is the industry standard in music

recognition technology and related content delivery.

For more information visit www.gracenote.com.

RGB

This refers to the three primary colours of light, red (R), green (G),

and blue (B) and also the method of producing video that uses them.

By dividing the video signal into the three colours for transmission,

noise is reduced for even higher quality images.

Gracenote^®Proprietary Legends

2009 Gracenote. This product and service may practice one or

more of the following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525; #6,061,680;

#6,154,773, #6,161,132, #6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459,

#6,330,593, and other patents issued or pending. Some services

supplied under license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent:

#6,304,523.

Sampling frequency

Sampling is the process of converting the heights of sound wave

(analog signal) samples taken at set periods into digits (digital

encoding). Sampling frequency is the number of samples taken per

second, so larger numbers mean more faithful reproduction of the

original sound.

Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote.

The Gracenote logo and logotype, and the “Powered by

Gracenote” logo are trademarks of Gracenote.

Signal Quality

This is the guide for checking the aerial direction. The numbered

values displayed do not indicate the strength of the signal, but the

quality of the signal (the signal to noise ratio, or “S/N”). The channels

you can receive are affected by weather conditions, seasons, time

(day/night), region, length of the cable that is connected to the aerial,

etc.

Gracenote^®End-User License Agreement

Thumbnail

This refers to a miniature representation of a picture used to display

multiple pictures in the form of a list.

USE OF THIS PRODUCT IMPLIES ACCEPTANCE OF THE

TERMS BELOW.

This application or device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of

Emeryville, California (“Gracenote”). The software from Gracenote

(the “Gracenote Software”) enables this application to perform disc

and/or file identification and obtain music-related information,

including name, artist, track, and title information (“Gracenote Data”)

from online servers or embedded databases (collectively,

“Gracenote Servers”) and to perform other functions. You may use

Gracenote Data only by means of the intended End-User functions

of this application or device.

WMA

WMA is a compression format developed by Microsoft Corporation.

It achieves the same sound quality as MP3 with a file size that is

smaller than that of MP3.

1080i

In one high definition image, 1080 (1125) alternating scan lines pass

every 1/50th of a second to create an interlace image. Because

1080i (1125i) more than doubles current television broadcasts of

480i (525i), the detail is much clearer and creates a more realistic

and rich image.

You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the Gracenote

Software, and Gracenote Servers for your own personal non-

commercial use only. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or

transmit the Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to any third

party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE

DATA, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE

SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.

1080p

In one high definition image, 1080 (1125) scan lines pass at the

same time every 1/50^thof a second to create a progressive image.

Since progressive video does not alternate scan lines like interlace,

there is a minimal amount of screen flicker.

You agree that your non-exclusive license to use the Gracenote

Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will terminate

if you violate these restrictions. If your license terminates, you agree

to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote

Software, and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves all rights in

Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and the Gracenote

Servers, including all ownership rights. Under no circumstances will

Gracenote become liable for any payment to you for any information

that you provide. You agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its

rights under this Agreement against you directly in its own name.

720p

In one high definition image, 720 (750) scan lines pass at the same

time every 1/50^thof a second to create a progressive image. Since

progressive video does not alternate scan lines like interlace, there

is a minimal amount of screen flicker.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby

Laboratories.

The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to track queries for

statistical purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric

identifier is to allow the Gracenote service to count queries without

knowing anything about who you are. For more information, see the

web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote

service.

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942;

5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and

worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS and DTS 2.0 + Digital

Out are registered trademarks and the DTS logos and Symbol

Reserved.

The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote Data are

licensed to you “AS IS.”

This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is

protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights.

Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized

by Macrovision, and is intended for home and other limited

viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision.

Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.

Gracenote makes no representations or warranties, express or

implied, regarding the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in the

Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete data from

the Gracenote Servers or to change data categories for any cause

that Gracenote deems sufficient. No warranty is made that the

Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are error-free or that

functioning of Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers will be

uninterrupted. Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with new

enhanced or additional data types or categories that Gracenote may

provide in the future and is free to discontinue its services at any

time.

Plays DivX^®video

DivX^®is a registered trademark of DivX, Inc., and is used under

license.

HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface

are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.

GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR

IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED

WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT.

GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL

BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE

OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL

GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR

INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST

REVENUES.

HDAVI Control™ is a trademark of Panasonic Corporation.

Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or

registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United

States and/or other countries.

This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of

Microsoft Corporation and third parties. Use or distribution of

such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a

license from Microsoft or an authorized Microsoft subsidiary and

third parties.

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3DQDVRQLFꢀ:DUUDQW\ꢀ

ꢀꢁꢂ 7KHꢂ SURGXFWꢂ LVꢂ ZDUUDQWHGꢂ IRUꢂ ꢀꢃꢂ PRQWKVꢂ IURPꢂ WKHꢂ GDWHꢂ RIꢂ SXUFKDVHꢁꢂ 6XEMHFWꢂ WRꢂ WKHꢂ FRQGLWLRQVꢂ RIꢂ WKLVꢂ ZDUUDQW\ꢂ

3DQDVRQLFꢂRUꢂLWꢄVꢂ$XWKRULVHGꢂ6HUYLFHꢂ&HQWUHꢂZLOOꢂSHUIRUPꢂQHFHVVDU\ꢂVHUYLFHꢂRQꢂWKHꢂSURGXFWꢂZLWKRXWꢂFKDUJHꢂIRUꢂSDUWVꢂ

RUꢂODERXUꢂLIꢅꢂLQꢂWKHꢂRSLQLRQꢂRIꢂ3DQDVRQLFꢅꢂWKHꢂSURGXFWꢂLVꢂIRXQGꢂWRꢂEHꢂIDXOW\ꢂZLWKLQꢂWKHꢂZDUUDQW\ꢂSHULRGꢁꢂ

ꢃꢁꢂ 7KLVꢂZDUUDQW\ꢂRQO\ꢂDSSOLHVꢂWRꢂ3DQDVRQLFꢂSURGXFWVꢂSXUFKDVHGꢂLQꢂ$XVWUDOLDꢂDQGꢂVROGꢂE\ꢂ3DQDVRQLFꢂ$XVWUDOLDꢂRUꢂLWVꢂ

$XWKRULVHGꢂ 'LVWULEXWRUVꢂ RUꢂ 'HDOHUVꢂ DQGꢂ RQO\ꢂ ZKHUHꢂ WKHꢂ SURGXFWVꢂ DUHꢂ XVHGꢂ DQGꢂ VHUYLFHGꢂ ZLWKLQꢂ $XVWUDOLDꢂ RUꢂ LWꢄVꢂ

WHUULWRULHVꢁꢂ:DUUDQW\ꢂFRYHUꢂRQO\ꢂDSSOLHVꢂWRꢂVHUYLFHꢂFDUULHGꢂRXWꢂE\ꢂDꢂ3DQDVRQLFꢂ$XWKRULVHGꢂ6HUYLFHꢂ&HQWUHꢂDQGꢂRQO\ꢂ

LIꢂYDOLGꢂSURRIꢂRIꢂSXUFKDVHꢂLVꢂSUHVHQWHGꢂZKHQꢂZDUUDQW\ꢂVHUYLFHꢂLVꢂUHTXHVWHGꢁꢂ

ꢆꢁꢂ 7KLVꢂ ZDUUDQW\ꢂ RQO\ꢂ DSSOLHVꢂ LIꢂ WKHꢂ SURGXFWꢂ KDVꢂ EHHQꢂ LQVWDOOHGꢂ DQGꢂ XVHGꢂ LQꢂ DFFRUGDQFHꢂ ZLWKꢂ WKHꢂ PDQXIDFWXUHU¶Vꢂ

UHFRPPHQGDWLRQVꢂꢇDVꢂQRWHGꢂLQꢂWKHꢂRSHUDWLQJꢂLQVWUXFWLRQVꢈꢂXQGHUꢂQRUPDOꢂXVHꢂDQGꢂUHDVRQDEOHꢂFDUHꢂꢇLQꢂWKHꢂRSLQLRQꢂRIꢂ

3DQDVRQLFꢈꢁꢂ7KHꢂZDUUDQW\ꢂFRYHUVꢂQRUPDOꢂGRPHVWLFꢂXVHꢂRQO\ꢂDQGꢂGRHVꢂQRWꢂFRYHUꢂGDPDJHꢅꢂPDOIXQFWLRQꢂRUꢂIDLOXUHꢂ

UHVXOWLQJꢂIURPꢂXVHꢂRIꢂLQFRUUHFWꢂYROWDJHVꢅꢂLQFRUUHFWꢂLQVWDOODWLRQꢅꢂDFFLGHQWꢅꢂPLVXVHꢅꢂQHJOHFWꢅꢂEXLOGꢉXSꢂRIꢂGLUWꢂRUꢂGXVWꢅꢂ

DEXVHꢅꢂPDODGMXVWPHQWꢂRIꢂFXVWRPHUꢂFRQWUROVꢅꢂPDLQVꢂVXSSO\ꢂSUREOHPVꢅꢂWKXQGHUVWRUPꢂDFWLYLW\ꢅꢂLQIHVWDWLRQꢂE\ꢂLQVHFWVꢂ

RUꢂ YHUPLQꢅꢂ WDPSHULQJꢂ RUꢂ UHSDLUꢂ E\ꢂ XQDXWKRULVHGꢂ SHUVRQVꢂ ꢇLQFOXGLQJꢂ XQDXWKRULVHGꢂ DOWHUDWLRQVꢈꢅꢂ H[SRVXUHꢂ WRꢂ

DEQRUPDOO\ꢂFRUURVLYHꢂFRQGLWLRQVꢂRUꢂDQ\ꢂIRUHLJQꢂREMHFWꢂRUꢂPDWWHUꢂKDYLQJꢂHQWHUHGꢂWKHꢂSURGXFWꢁꢂ

ꢊꢁꢂ 7KLVꢂZDUUDQW\ꢂGRHVꢂQRWꢂFRYHUꢂWKHꢂIROORZLQJꢂLWHPVꢂXQOHVVꢂWKHꢂIDXOWꢂRUꢂGHIHFWꢂH[LVWHGꢂDWꢂWKHꢂWLPHꢂRIꢂSXUFKDVHꢋꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂ

ꢂ

ꢇDꢈꢂ9LGHRꢂRUꢂ$XGLRꢂ7DSHVꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂ

ꢂ

ꢇHꢈꢂ&DELQHWꢂ3DUWꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂ ꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂ

ꢇEꢈꢂ'9'ꢂ9LGHRꢅꢂ%OXꢂ5D\ꢅꢂRUꢂ5HFRUGDEOHꢂ'LVFVꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂ ꢇIꢈꢂ,QIRUPDWLRQꢂVWRUHGꢂRQꢂWKHꢂ+DUGꢂ'LVNꢂ'ULYHꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂ

ꢇFꢈꢂ6'ꢂFDUGVꢂRUꢂ86%ꢂGHYLFHVꢂ ꢇJꢈꢂ8VHUꢂUHSODFHDEOHꢂ%DWWHULHVꢂꢂꢂ

ꢇGꢈꢂ9LGHRꢂRUꢂDXGLRꢂ+HDGVꢂIURPꢂZHDUꢂDQGꢂWHDUꢂLQꢂQRUPDOꢂXVHꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂ

ꢂ

ꢌꢁꢂ 6RPHꢂSURGXFWVꢂPD\ꢂEHꢂVXSSOLHGꢂZLWKꢂHWKHUQHWꢂFRQQHFWLRQꢂKDUGZDUHꢁꢂ7KHꢂZDUUDQW\ꢂLVꢂOLPLWHGꢂRQꢂVXFKꢂSURGXFWVꢂDQGꢂ

ZLOOꢂQRWꢂFRYHUꢂ

ꢇDꢈꢂ,QWHUQHW FRQQHFWLRQꢂUHODWHGꢂSUREOHPVꢂ

ꢀEꢁ $FFHVVꢂIHHVꢂRUꢂFKDUJHVꢂLQFXUUHGꢂIRUꢂWKHꢂLQWHUQHW

ꢀFꢁꢂ WKHꢂXVHꢂRIꢂLQFRPSDWLEOHꢂVRIWZDUHꢂRUꢂVRIWZDUHꢂQRWꢂVSHFLILFDOO\ꢂVWLSXODWHGꢂLQꢂWKHꢂSURGXFWꢂRSHUDWLRQVꢂPDQXDOꢍꢂDQG

ꢀGꢁ DQ\ꢂLQGLUHFWꢂRUꢂFRQVHTXHQWLDOꢂFRVWVꢂDVVRFLDWHGꢂZLWKꢂWKHꢂLQFRUUHFWꢂXVHꢂRUꢂPLVXVHꢂRIꢂWKHꢂKDUGZDUHꢅꢂLWVꢂFRQQHFWLRQꢂ

WRꢂWKHꢂLQWHUQHWꢂRUꢂDQ\ꢂRWKHUꢂGHYLFHꢁꢂ

ꢂꢂ

ꢎꢁꢂ ,IꢂZDUUDQW\ꢂVHUYLFHꢂLVꢂUHTXLUHGꢂ\RXꢂVKRXOGꢋꢂ

xꢂ 7HOHSKRQHꢂ3DQDVRQLF¶Vꢂ &XVWRPHUꢂ &DUHꢂ &HQWUHꢂRQꢂꢀꢆꢃꢎꢏꢏꢂRUꢂYLVLWꢂ RXUꢂZHEVLWHꢂ DQGꢂ XVHꢂ WKHꢂ 6HUYLFHꢂ&HQWUHꢂ

/RFDWRUꢂIRUꢂWKHꢂQDPHꢐDGGUHVVꢂRIꢂWKHꢂQHDUHVWꢂ$XWKRULVHGꢂ6HUYLFHꢂ&HQWUHꢁꢂ

xꢂ 6HQGꢂ RUꢂ EULQJꢂ WKHꢂ SURGXFWꢂ WRꢂ Dꢂ 3DQDVRQLFꢂ $XWKRULVHGꢂ 6HUYLFHꢂ &HQWUHꢂ WRJHWKHUꢂ ZLWKꢂ \RXUꢂ SURRIꢂ RIꢂ SXUFKDVHꢂ

UHFHLSWꢂ DVꢂ Dꢂ SURRIꢂ RIꢂ SXUFKDVHꢂ GDWHꢁꢂ 3OHDVHꢂ QRWHꢂ WKDWꢂ IUHLJKWꢂ DQGꢂ LQVXUDQFHꢂ WRꢂ DQGꢂ ꢐꢂ RUꢂ IURPꢂ \RXUꢂ QHDUHVWꢂ

$XWKRULVHGꢂ6HUYLFHꢂ&HQWUHꢂPXVWꢂEHꢂDUUDQJHGꢂE\ꢂ\RXꢁꢂ

ꢑꢁꢂ 7KHꢂZDUUDQWLHVꢂKHUHE\ꢂFRQIHUUHGꢂGRꢂQRWꢂH[WHQGꢂWRꢅꢂDQGꢂH[FOXGHꢅꢂDQ\ꢂFRVWVꢂDVVRFLDWHGꢂZLWKꢂWKHꢂLQVWDOODWLRQꢅꢂGHꢉ

LQVWDOODWLRQꢂRUꢂUHꢉLQVWDOODWLRQꢂRIꢂDꢂSURGXFWꢅꢂLQFOXGLQJꢂFRVWVꢂUHODWHGꢂWRꢂWKHꢂPRXQWLQJꢅꢂGHꢉPRXQWLQJꢂRUꢂUHPRXQWLQJꢂRIꢂ

DQ\ꢂVFUHHQꢅꢂꢇDQGꢂDQ\ꢂRWKHUꢂDQFLOODU\ꢂDFWLYLWLHVꢈꢅꢂGHOLYHU\ꢅꢂKDQGOLQJꢅꢂIUHLJKWLQJꢅꢂWUDQVSRUWDWLRQꢂRUꢂLQVXUDQFHꢂRIꢂWKHꢂ

SURGXFWꢂRUꢂDQ\ꢂSDUWꢂWKHUHRIꢂRUꢂUHSODFHPHQWꢂRIꢂDQGꢂGRꢂQRWꢂH[WHQGꢂWRꢅꢂDQGꢂH[FOXGHꢅꢂDQ\ꢂGDPDJHꢂRUꢂORVVꢂRFFXUULQJꢂE\ꢂ

UHDVRQꢂRIꢅꢂGXULQJꢅꢂDVVRFLDWHGꢂZLWKꢅꢂRUꢂUHODWHGꢂWRꢂVXFKꢂLQVWDOODWLRQꢅꢂGHꢉLQVWDOODWLRQꢅꢂUHꢉLQVWDOODWLRQꢂRUꢂWUDQVLWꢁꢂ

3DQDVRQLFꢂ$XWKRULVHGꢂ6HUYLFHꢂ&HQWUHVꢂDUHꢂORFDWHGꢂLQꢂPDMRUꢂPHWURSROLWDQꢂDUHDVꢂDQGꢂPRVWꢂUHJLRQDOꢂFHQWUHVꢂRIꢂ$XVWUDOLDꢅꢂ

KRZHYHUꢅꢂFRYHUDJHꢂZLOOꢂYDU\ꢂGHSHQGDQWꢂRQꢂSURGXFWꢁꢂ)RUꢂDGYLFHꢂRQꢂH[DFWꢂ$XWKRULVHGꢂ6HUYLFHꢂ&HQWUHꢂORFDWLRQVꢂIRUꢂ\RXUꢂ

SURGXFWꢅꢂSOHDVHꢂWHOHSKRQHꢂRXUꢂ &XVWRPHUꢂ &DUHꢂ &HQWUHꢂ RQꢂꢀꢆꢃꢎꢏꢏꢂRUꢂ YLVLWꢂ RXUꢂ ZHEVLWHꢂ DQGꢂ XVHꢂ WKHꢂ 6HUYLFHꢂ&HQWUHꢂ

/RFDWRUꢁꢂ

8QOHVVꢂRWKHUZLVHꢂVSHFLILHGꢂWRꢂWKHꢂFRQVXPHUꢂWKHꢂEHQHILWVꢂFRQIHUUHGꢂE\ꢂWKLVꢂH[SUHVVꢂZDUUDQW\ꢂDUHꢂDGGLWLRQDOꢂWRꢂDOOꢂRWKHUꢂ

FRQGLWLRQVꢅꢂZDUUDQWLHVꢅꢂJXDUDQWHHVꢅꢂULJKWVꢂDQGꢂUHPHGLHVꢂH[SUHVVHGꢂRUꢂLPSOLHGꢂE\ꢂWKHꢂ7UDGHꢀ3UDFWLFHVꢀ$FWꢀꢁꢂꢃꢄꢀDQGꢂ

VLPLODUꢂFRQVXPHUꢂSURWHFWLRQꢂSURYLVLRQVꢂFRQWDLQHGꢂLQꢂOHJLVODWLRQꢂRIꢂWKHꢂ6WDWHVꢂDQGꢂ7HUULWRULHVꢂDQGꢂDOOꢂRWKHUꢂREOLJDWLRQVꢂ

DQGꢂOLDELOLWLHVꢂRQꢂWKHꢂSDUWꢂRIꢂWKHꢂPDQXIDFWXUHUꢂRUꢂVXSSOLHUꢂDQGꢂQRWKLQJꢂFRQWDLQHGꢂKHUHLQꢂVKDOOꢂUHVWULFWꢂRUꢂPRGLI\ꢂVXFKꢂ

ULJKWVꢅꢂUHPHGLHVꢅꢂREOLJDWLRQVꢂRUꢂOLDELOLWLHVꢁꢂ

0D\ꢀꢅꢆꢆꢇ

7+,6ꢀ:$55$17<ꢀ&$5'ꢀ$1'ꢀ7+(ꢀ385&+$6(ꢀ'2&.(7ꢀꢁ25ꢀ6,0,/$5ꢀ3522)ꢀ2)ꢀ385&+$6(ꢂꢀ

6+28/'ꢀ%(ꢀ5(7$,1('ꢀ%<ꢀ7+(ꢀ&86720(5ꢀ$7ꢀ$//ꢀ7,0(6

,Iꢀ\RXꢀUHTXLUHꢀDVVLVWDQFHꢀUHJDUGLQJꢀZDUUDQW\ꢀFRQGLWLRQVꢀRUꢀDQ\ꢀRWKHUꢀHQTXLULHVꢁꢀ

SOHDVHꢀFRQWDFWꢀRXUꢀ&XVWRPHUꢀ&DUHꢀ&HQWUHꢀYLDꢀWKHꢀ3DQDVRQLFꢀZHEVLWHꢀZZZꢂSDQDVRQLFꢂFRPꢂDXꢀꢀRUꢀ

E\ꢀSKRQHꢀRQꢀꢃꢄꢅꢀꢆꢇꢇꢂꢀ,IꢀSKRQLQJꢀLQꢁꢀSOHDVHꢀHQVXUHꢀ\RXꢀKDYHꢀ\RXUꢀRSHUDWLQJꢀLQVWUXFWLRQVꢀDYDLODEOHꢂꢀ

3DQDVRQLFꢀ$XVWUDOLDꢀ3W\ꢁꢀ/LPLWHGꢀ

$&1ꢂꢏꢏꢀꢂꢌꢒꢃꢂꢀꢓꢑꢂꢂꢂ$%1ꢂꢓꢆꢂꢏꢏꢀꢂꢌꢒꢃꢂꢀꢓꢑ

/RFNHGꢂ%DJꢂꢌꢏꢌꢅꢂ)UHQFKVꢂ)RUHVWꢅꢂ16:ꢂꢃꢏꢓꢎꢂ

352ꢉꢏꢆꢀꢉ)ꢀꢀꢂꢂ,VVXHꢋꢂꢀꢁꢏꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂ

ꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢃꢒꢉꢏꢌꢉꢃꢏꢏꢓ

54$ꢏꢃꢊꢌ

RQT9306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Index

Adjust the audio quality

(Sound menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Adjust the picture quality

(Picture menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Album (Music)

Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Album (Still picture)

Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Aspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Audio

Digital broadcast (DVB Multi Audio) . . . 55

Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Auto Renewal Recording . . . . . . . . . . . 24

AV2 Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Edit

Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Ratings level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Aspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 61

Auto Renewal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

DV automatic recording . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Relief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 23–27

Relief Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Remote control code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Repeat Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 54

Resume play function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Music on HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Enabling discs to be played on other

equipment - Finalise . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Finalise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 81

Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57, 81

FR (Flexible Recording Mode) . . . 20, 21

FUNCTION MENU Display . . . . . . . . 7, 35

G-CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Screen Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Select channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Signal Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Simultaneous rec and play . . . . . . . . . 21

Slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Soundtrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 61

Still picture

Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Subtitle

Gracenote^®database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

HDAVI Control . . . . . . . . 8, 36–37, 63, 67

HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 63, 67, 81

High Speed Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Change Thumbnail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Channel

Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59, 60

Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 38

Chapter Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 61

Chasing playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Child Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Cleaning

Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Clock Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Connection

Aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 68, 69

Amplifier, receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

DV input terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 67

Television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 66–69

Video cassette recorder . . . . . . . . . 68, 69

Copy

Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

SD Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Title/Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Copy (playlist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

CPRM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Create Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 39

Create playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

JPEG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 32–33, 81

Language

Code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Disc menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Soundtrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 61

Subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 61

LPCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 81

Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 61

Switch the audio/subtitles on the disc

(Disc menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

System Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Manual Skip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

DivX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30–31

Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Mode

Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Still Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Music on HDD

Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Time Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 23–27

Tuning

Analogue broadcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Digital broadcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

TV Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 26

TV System (PAL/NTSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

USB

Copy (Music) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Copy (SD Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Copy (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Supported formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Name

Album (Music) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Album (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 39

New Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 62

Delete

VIERA Link . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 36–37, 63, 67

Album (Music) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Album (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

All titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 41

Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Digital Audio Output settings . . . . 62, 63

Digital broadcast

Digital channel information . . . . . . . . . . 14

DVB Multi Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

New Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 62

Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Select the channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Signal Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

System Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

DIRECT NAVIGATOR . . . . . 29, 32, 38, 42

Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–11

Display

Partial Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Pause Live TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

VIERA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Power Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Progressive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 63, 81

Properties

Music on HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 42

Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Protection

Album (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Digital channel information . . . . . . . . . . 14

Status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Divide Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

DivX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 30–31, 81

DV automatic recording . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

DVB Multi Audio

Quick View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Select audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Panasonic Corporation

Web Site: http://panasonic.net

RQT9306-L

F0309ST0

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Miele Clothes Dryer T8866WP User Manual
Miller Electric Welder OM 193 084E User Manual
National Home Security System DS36C278 User Manual
NEC Answering Machine SV8100 User Manual
Nortel Networks Network Card DS30 User Manual
Omnimount Indoor Furnishings OM10020 User Manual
Omron Healthcare Blood Pressure Monitor HEM 780 User Manual
OWI Speaker DR 8 User Manual
Panasonic Hair Clippers ERCA35 User Manual
Panasonic Impact Driver EY7540 U1 User Manual